(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

Catalog 1982-83 




LYCOMING COLLEGE 



Communicating with Lycoming College 

Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Director of Admissions: 

Admissions; requests for catalogs and other publications. 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses. 

Director of Student Financial Aid: 

Scholarships and loan funds; financial assistance. 

Dean of the College: 

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities. 

Dean of Student Services: 

Student activities; residence halls; religious life; health services; academic 
support services. 

Registrar: 
Student records; transcript requests; academic policies. 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities. 

Director of Development: 

Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs. 

Director of Alumni Affairs: 
Alumni information. 

Director of Public Relations: 

Public information; publications; sports information. 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701-5192 

The College telephone number is (717) 326-1951. 



Visitors 



Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, 
call the Office of Admissions before your visit to arrange a mutually conve- 
nient time. 



Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age, sex, race, 
religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate 
on the basis of age, sex, race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the 
administration of any of its policies and programs. 




LYCOMING COLLEGE 

Catalog 1982-83 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 20 

Student Services 57 

Admission 59 

Financial Matters 60 

Academic Calendar, 1982-1983 63 

Directory 64 

Index 71 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, 
coeducational college dedicated to 
providing the type of learning that 
can be used for a lifetime — the 
liberal arts and sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance 
derives from its enduring commit- 
ment to the value of this type of 
education, as offered by a superior 
teaching faculty. The College's prin- 
cipal aim is to help students develop a 
central core of integrated values, 



Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they 
are interested in teaching, medicine, 
law, dentistry, or the ministry, they 
can take courses needed to enter their 
advanced study. 

Students also can study engineer- 
ing, forestry or environmental 
studies, podiatric medicine, op- 
tometry, medical technology, nuclear 
medicine technology, and sculpture 




skill, information, and strategies 
while they learn to communicate, 
reason, make decisions, understand, 
and use their imagination. This type 
of education can lead to productive 
and fulfilling lives in many fields 
while allowing lifelong growth and 
development. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 29 major fields, a bachelor 
of fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Be- 
cause it is built upon the two prin- 
ciples of the liberal arts known as 
distribution and concentration, it 
allows students to study in breadth 
and depth. 



through cooperative programs 
operated by Lycoming with other col- 
leges and universities. Or, they can 
study abroad or in Harrisburg, Pa., 
Washington, D.C., or New York City 
through other off-campus study pro- 
grams. 

Most students complete their pro- 
gram of study in four years, usually 
by taking four courses each fall and 
spring semester. But students also can 
take one course during Lycoming's 
May term, or two courses during the 
summer term. 

Recognizing students' concerns 
about careers, Lycoming offers ex- 
tensive counseling through the Career 
Development Center and advisory 



committees for prelaw, prehealth 
professions, and premedical students. 
The College also operates a wide- 
ranging internship program that 
allows students to earn academic 
credit while working at area 
businesses, government offices, and 
nonprofit organizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of faculty to 
students is 15 to one, which means 
that most classes are small and there 
is abundant opportunity for in- 
dividual attention. All faculty 
members teach. More than 70 percent 
of Lycoming's faculty hold the 
highest degrees in their fields from 
the nation's outstanding colleges and 
universities. And, faculty members 
take their advising seriously. They 
care about students, and encourage 
and guide them so they receive the 
education they want. 

Nineteen buildings sit on Lycom- 
ing's main campus. Most of them 
have been built since 1950. The 
modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, the library, Arena 
Theatre, planetarium, student union, 
computer center, electronic-music 
studio, photography laboratory, art 
gallery, and physical educa- 
tion/recreation center. The computer 
center opened in 1979; the art gallery 
and phys-ed center opened in 1980. 

Lycoming houses approximately 
900 of its 1,200 students in the 
residence halls, which include double 
and single rooms. Most students find 
the campus friendly and comfortable, 
with all of the buildings easy to reach 
from anywhere on campus. Students 
come from a variety of economic 
classes, religious beliefs, and 
geographic areas, although most 
students call Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, or New York their home. 
They work and play together in an at- 
mosphere of respect and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of ex- 
tracurricular activities. Student 
government groups help to plan cam- 
pus activities and social events. 
Numerous clubs, honor societies, 
social fraternities and sororities, the 
yearbook and literary magazine, and 



the band and widely acclaimed choir 
meet other student interests. Students 
who like to perform or compete can 
act on the Arena Theatre stage or 
play on intercollegiate or intramural 
sports teams. Intercollegiate 
teams for men include football, soc- 
cer, basketball, wrestling, tennis, 
golf, swimming, and track and field. 
Intercollegiate teams for women 
include basketball, tennis, field 
hockey, swimming, and track and 
field. 

In addition, students who like hik- 
ing, backpacking, skiing, camping, 
fishing, hunting, kayaking, spelunk- 
ing, and other outdoor sports will 
find Lycoming's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 
prominence near downtown 
Williamsport, a small city nestled 
along the West Branch of the Sus- 
quehanna River in northcentral Penn- 
sylvania's rolling hills and valleys. 
Yet, the College is only a three or 
four hour drive away from 



metropolitan centers such as New 
York City, Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, 
Washington, D.C., Baltimore, Syracuse, 
Rochester, and the New Jersey shore 
points. The Williamsport-metro area 
is home to about 75,000 persons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship 
with The United Methodist Church. 
It supports the Methodist tradition of 
providing an education for persons of 
all faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a 
member of the Middle States Associa- 
tion of Colleges and Schools, and the 
University Senate of The United 
Methodist Church. It is a member of 
the Association of American Col- 
leges, the Pennsylvania Association 
of Colleges and Universities, the 
Commission for Independent Col- 
leges and Universities, the National 
Commission on Accrediting, and the 
National Association of Schools and 
Colleges of The United Methodist 
Church. 



HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 
1812 as the Williamsport Academy, 
an elementary and secondary school. 
Thirty-six years later, the academy 
became the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary under the patronage of The 
Methodist Episcopal Church. The 
seminary operated as a private board- 
ing school until 1929, when a college 
curriculum was added and it became 
the Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and Junior College. In 1947, the 
junior college became a four-year 
degree-granting college of liberal arts 
and sciences. It adopted the name 
Lycoming, derived from the Indian 
word "lacomic," meaning "Great 
Stream." The word Lycoming has 
been common to northcentral Penn- 
sylvania since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF ARTS 
DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the princi- 
ple that a liberal arts education is the 
best hope for an enlightened 
citizenry. Consequently, the bachelor 
of arts degree is conferred upon the 
student who has completed an educa- 
tional program incorporating the two 
principles of the liberal arts known as 
distribution and concentration. The 
objective of the distribution principle 
is to insure that the student achieves 
breadth in learning through the study 
of the major dimensions of human in- 
quiry: the humanities, the social 
sciences, and the natural sciences. 
The objective of the concentration 
principle is to provide depth of learn- 
ing through completion of a program 
of study in a given discipline or sub- 
ject area known as the major. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the distribution 
program. 

— complete a major consisting 
of at least eight courses while 
achieving a minimum grade 
point average of 2.0 in those 
courses. 

— earn one year of credit in 
physical education. All 
students must demonstrate 
competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination 
and review of the student's 
medical history and family 
physician's report.) 

— pass a minimum of 128 
semester hours (32 unit 
courses) with a minimum 
cumulative average of 2.0. 
Additional credits beyond 
128 semester hours may be 
completed provided the 
minimum 2.0 cumulative 



average is maintained. 

— complete in residence the 
final eight courses offered 
for the degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obliga- 
tions incurred at the College. 

— complete the above re- 
quirements within seven 
years of continuous enroll- 
ment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of 
specific requirements are made by the 
Committee on Academic Standing. 

THE BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS 
DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is 
specifically designed to train profes- 
sional artists. The BFA in sculpture is 
a synthesis of three diverse forms of 
education: a studio art program that 
emphasizes the skills and concepts of 
the visual language; an appren- 
ticeship that takes technical expertise 
as the departure point, and the 
scholastic method employed in both 
art history and the general-education 
component. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS 
DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is ex- 
pected to complete the following re- 
quirements in order to qualify for 
graduation: 

— complete the 12-course Art 
Department course of study. 

— complete the distribution 
program. 

— complete a total of 32 course 
units achieving a minimum 
grade point average of 2.0 in 
those courses taken within 
the College. 

— complete one of the field 
specialization appren- 
ticeships at the Johnson 
Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in 
physical education. All 



students must demonstrate 
competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination 
and review of the student's 
medical history and family 
physician's report.) 
complete in residence the 
final eight courses offered 
for the degree at Lycoming, 
satisfy all financial obliga- 
tions incurred at the College, 
have a public exhibition of 
original art work and make 
an oral defense. 



THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN 
NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree 
is designed to prepare men and 
women as beginning practitioners of 
professional nursing, qualified for 
first-level positions in a variety of 
health settings or for graduate study 
in nursing. Upon satisfactory comple- 
tion of the program, a graduate is 
eligible to write the State Board of 
Nursing examination for licensure as 
a registered nurse. The goal of the 
program is to develop a liberally 
educated and self-directed individual 
who is prepared to contribute to the 
welfare of the nation through the 
practice of professional nursing 
which supports the promotion and 
restoration of health of individuals 
and families in a variety of settings. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN 
NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is ex- 
pected to complete the following re- 
quirements in order to qualify for 
graduation: 

— complete the 13 course major 
with a minimum cumulative 
average of 2.0, including the 
required May term following 
the junior year. 



— complete the distribution re- 
quirement as modified for 
the BSN degree. 

— complete a minimum of 128 
semester hours (32 units) 
with a minimum cumulative 
average of 2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in 
physical education. All 
students must demonstrate 
competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemption may be 
granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination 
and review of the student's 
medical history and family 
physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the 
final eight courses offered 
for the degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obliga- 
tions incurred at the College. 

— complete the degree re- 
quirements within a five-year 
period after admission to the 
nursing major. Candidates 
who are unable to meet this 
requirement must petition 
for an extension. 

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only 
one distribution requirement. 
Courses for which a grade of "S" is 
recorded may not be used toward the 
fulfillment of the distribution re- 
quirements. (Refer to page 9 for 
an explanation of the grading 
system.) A course in any of the 
following distribution requirements 
refers to a full-unit (four semester 
hours) course taken at Lycoming, any 
appropriate combination of frac- 
tional unit courses taken at Lycoming 
which accumulate to four semester 
hours, or any single course of three or 
more semester hours transferred from 
another institution. 

English — All students are required 
to pass English 2 and one other 
English course, excluding English 1. 
English 2 should be taken during the 
freshman year and must be taken no 
later than the second semester (usual- 



ly the spring semester) of the 
sophomore year. In addition, all 
students who have not been exempted 
from English 1 must receive a mark 
of "Satisfactory" in English 1 before 
being permitted to enroll in English 2. 
Students are placed in English 1 or 2 
on the basis of their performance on 
the Achievement Examination in 
English Composition. 

Foreign Language or Mathematics 

— Students are required to meet a 
minimum basic requirement in either 
a foreign language or the 
mathematical sciences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French, German, 
Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish and are 
required to pass two courses on the 
intermediate or higher course level. 
Placement at the appropriate course 
level will be determined by the faculty 
of the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures. Students 
who have completed two or more 
years of a given language in high 
school are not admitted for credit to 
the elementary course in the same 
foreign language except by written 
permission of the chairman of the 
department. French 28 and Spanish 
28 will meet part of this requirement 
only if the section taught in the 
language is completed. 

Mathematics. Students are re- 
quired to demonstrate competence in 
basic algebra and to pass three units 
of mathematical science other than 
Mathematics 5. Competence in basic 
algebra may be demonstrated either 
by passing the basic algebra section of 
the Mathematics Placement Ex- 
amination or by passing Mathematics 
5. By demonstrating higher com- 
petence on the Mathematics Place- 
ment Examination, students may 
reduce the requirement to two units 
of mathematical science. No more 
than I '/' units may be taken in com- 
puter science. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in 

either religion or philosophy. Any 
two religion courses may be used to 



fulfill the philosophy/religion 
distribution requirement, with this 
exception: only one course from the 
combination Religion 20-21 may be 
selected for distribution. 

Fine Arts — Students are required 
to pass two courses as indicated in 
art, literature, music, or theatre. 

Art. Any two courses. 

Literature. Any two literature 
courses selected from the offerings of 
the Departments of English and 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 
(French, German, or Spanish). 

Music. Any of the following com- 
binations of music offerings totaling 
the equivalent of eight semester 
hours: 

— two courses from those 
numbered Music 10 through 
Music 46. 

— eight semesters of applied 
music (private lessons) and / 
or ensemble (choir, band) 
from courses numbered 60 
through 69, earned frac- 
tionally as follows: 

— (1) for private lessons (Music 
60 through 66), a one-half 
hour lesson per week earns 
one-half hour of credit; a 
one-hour lesson earns one 
hour of credit. Note: There 
are extra fees for these 
lessons. (For details see 
Department of Music course 
offerings described elsewhere 
in this catalog.) 

— (2) credit may be earned for 
participation in the College 
choir (Music 68) and / or 
band (Music 69); however, a 
student may earn no more 
than one hour each semester 
even though participating in 
both band and choir. (For 
further details, please see the 
Department of Music offer- 
ings elsewhere in this 
catalog.) 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by selec- 
ting any two of the following recom- 
mended courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 



18, 32, 33, or other courses with the 
consent of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are re- 
quired to pass any two courses in one 
of the following disciplines: 
astronomy / physics, biology, chem- 
istry. 

History and Social Science — 

Students are required to pass two 
courses as indicated in economics, 
history, political science, psychology, 
or sociology / anthropology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Any two courses. 

Sociology / Anthropology. 
Sociology / Anthropology 10 plus 
another course. 

THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a 
series of courses in one departmental 
or interdisciplinary (established or in- 
dividual) major. Specific course re- 
quirements for each major offered by 
the College are listed in the cur- 
riculum section of this catalog. 
Students must earn a 2.0 or higher 
grade-point average in those courses 
stipulated as comprising the major. 
(This requirement is not met by 
averaging the grades for all courses 
completed in the major department.) 
Students must declare a major by the 
beginning of their junior year. 
Departmental and established inter- 
disciplinary majors are declared in 
the Office of the Registrar, whereas 
individual interdisciplinary majors 
must be approved by the Committee 
on Curriculum Development. 
Students may complete more than 
one major, each of which will be 
recorded on the transcript. Students 
may be removed from major status if 
they are not making satisfactory pro- 
gress in the major. This action is 
taken by the Dean of the College 
upon the recommendation of the 
department, coordinating committee 
(for established interdisciplinary ma- 
jors), or Curriculum Development 



Committee (for individual inter- 
disciplinary majors). The decision of 
the Dean of the College may be ap- 
pealed to the Academic Standing 
Committee by the student involved or 
the recommending department or 
committee. 

Departmental Majors — Depart- 
mental majors are available in the 
following areas: 



Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business 

Administration 
Chemistry 
Computer Science 
Economics 
English 
Foreign 
Languages and 

Literatures 

French, 



German, 

Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 
Sociology / 

Anthropology 
Theatre 



Established Interdisciplinary Majors 

— The following established inter- 
disciplinary majors include course 
work in two or more departments: 



Accounting- 
Mathematical 
Sciences 

American 
Studies 

Criminal 
Justice 



International 

Studies 
Literature 
Mass 

Communications 
Near East Culture 

and Archaeology 



Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major 
which is unique to their needs and ob- 
jectives and which combines course 
work in more than one department. 
This major is developed in consulta- 
tion with the student's faculty adviser 
and with a panel of faculty members 
from each of the sponsoring depart- 
ments. The application is acted upon 
by the Curriculum Development 
Committee. The major normally con- 
sists of 10 courses beyond those taken 
to satisfy the distribution re- 



quirements. Students are expected to 
complete at least six courses at the 
junior or senior level. Examples of in- 
dividual interdisciplinary majors are 
Racial and Cultural Minorities, Il- 
lustration in the Print Medium, En- 
viornmental Law, Advertising, 
Human Behavior, and Images of 
Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to 
Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree — 

Through a cooperative program with 
the Johnson Atelier Technical In- 
stitute of Sculpture, Princeton, New 
Jersey, students may earn a BFA 
degree in sculpture. The major con- 
sists of a core academic program, a 
course of study in art, elective 
courses, and an apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. 



THE MINOR 

The College awards a minor in 
recognition of concentrated work in 
an area other than a student's major. 
The requirements for a minor vary 
from department to department and 
students interested in pursuing a 
minor in a department should consult 
that department for its policy regard- 
ing minors. 

The minor must be approved and 
named appropriately by a major- 
granting department subject to the 
following limitations: 

— a minor must consist of a 
minimum of four unit courses 
selected from among the 
courses that are offered by one 
department. 

— a major department may 
count no more than two 
elementary courses as part of a 
minor. 

— if a major department counts 
an elementary course as part 
of the minor, then the minor 
must consist of at least five 
courses; if the major depart- 
ment counts two elementary 
courses as part of the minor, 
then the minor must consist of 
at least six courses. 



— no course which is counted as 
part of a student's major may 
be counted as part of his 
minor. 

— only one of the four courses 
may be numbered 50 or above. 

— no student with two majors 
may receive a minor. 

— no student may receive two 
minors. 

— a student's minor must be in 
an area different from his ma- 
jor and a student may not 
receive a minor from his major 
department unless his major 
department is foreign 
languages or mathematical 
sciences. 

— A student may not receive a 
minor unless his average in the 
courses which a department 
counts for his minor is a 
minimum of 2.0. 

Students must declare their intention 
to minor in a department by signing a 
form available from the department's 
chairperson. The name of the minor a 
student receives will be noted on the 
student's transcript. 



ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is 
the rich experience gained by the close 
association of students and faculty. 
The advisement program at Lycom- 
ing enables students to discuss 
academic and other problems as well 
as opportunities with faculty ad- 
visers, instructors, and the staffs of 
the Dean of the College and the Dean 
of Student Services. 

During the summer orientation, 
freshmen are assigned a faculty ad- 
viser who is prepared to assist new 
students with the challenges of an un- 
familiar social and academic environ- 
ment. All students are required to 
have a faculty adviser. When students 
have declared a major, they are then 
assigned an adviser from within the 
major department or program. 

Although the advisement program 
is an important part of the Lycoming 



academic experience, students are ex- 
pected to accept full responsibility for 
their academic programs, including 
satisfactory completion of program 
and College-wide requirements. 

Special advising for selected pro- 
fessions is provided by the health, 
legal, and theological professions ad- 
visory committees. Students in- 
terested in these professions should 
register with the appropriate commit- 
tee during their first semester of 
enrollment at Lycoming or im- 
mediately after they decide to enter 
these professions. 

Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional 
education for the health professions 
(allopathic, dental, osteopathic, 
podiatric and veterinary medicine, 
optometry, pharmacy) is organized 
around a solid foundation in biology, 
chemistry, mathematics, and physics 
and a wide range of subject matter 
from the humanities, social sciences, 
and fine arts. At least three years of 
undergraduate study is recommended 
before entry into a professional 
school; the normal procedure is to 
complete the bachelor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the 
health professions or in an allied 
health career should make their inten- 
tions known to the admissions office 
when applying and to the Health Pro- 
fessions Advisory Committee 
(HPAC) during their first semester. 
The committee advises students con- 
cerning preparation for and applica- 
tion to health-professions' schools. 
All pre-health professions students 
are invited to join the student pre- 
health professions association. (See 
also cooperative programs in 
podiatric medicine, optometry, and 
medical technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong 
academic preparation for students in- 
terested in law as a profession. Ad- 
mission to law school is not 
predicated upon a particular major or 



area of study; rather, a student is en- 
couraged to design a course of study 
(traditional or interdisciplinary ma- 
jor) which is of personal interest and 
significance. While no specific major 
is recommended, there are certain 
skills of particular relevance to the 
pre-law student: clear writing, 
analytical thinking, and language 
comprehension. These skills should 
be developed during the 
undergraduate years. 

Pre-law students should register 
with the Legal Professions Advisory 
Committee (LPAC) upon enterng 
Lycoming and should join the Pre- 
Law Society on campus. LPAC 
assists the pre-law student through 
advisement, compilation of recom- 
mendations, and dissemination of in- 
formation and materials about law 
and the legal profession. It sponsors 
Pre-LSAT workshops to help prepare 
students for the law boards and an 
annual Pre-law Night which brings 
admission deans, law students, and 
practicing lawyers on campus. The 
Pre-Law Society has sponsored films, 
speakers, and field trips, including 
several to the United States Supreme 
Court. 

Preparation for Theological Pro- 
fessions — The Theological Profes- 
sions Advisor Committee (TPAC) 
acts as a "center" for students, facul- 
ty, and clergy to discuss the needs of 
students who want to prepare 
themselves for the ministry, religious 
education, advanced training in 
religion, or related vocations. Also, it 
may help coordinate internships for 
students who desire practical ex- 
perience in the parish ministry or 
related areas. Upon entering Lycom- 
ing, students should register with 
TPAC if they plan to investigate the 
religious vocations. 

In general, students preparing to 
attend a theological seminary should 
examine the suggestions set down by 
the Association of Theological 
Schools (available from TPAC). 
Recommended is a board program in 
the liberal arts, a major in one of the 



8 



humanities (English, history, 
languages, literature, philosophy, 
religion) or one of the social sciences 
(American studies, criminal justice, 
economics, international studies, 
political science, psychology, 
sociology-anthropology), and a varie- 
ty of electives. Students preparing for 
a career in religious education should 
major in religion and elect five or six 
courses in psychology, education, 
and sociology. This program of study 
will qualify students to work as an 
educational assistant or a director of 
religious education after graduate 
study in a theological seminary. 

REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, 
students file a schedule form with the 
Office of the Registrar. The filing of 
this form by students and its accep- 
tance by the College is evidence of a 
commitment by students to perform 
in the courses listed to the best of 
their abilities. Any changes in the 
schedule of courses listed on the 
form, including changes in sections, 
without the formal approval of the 
Office of the Registrar will result in a 
grade of F. Students may not receive 
credit in courses in which they are not 
registered. Registration procedures 
may not be initiated after the close of 
the registration period. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course 
without any record of such enroll- 
ment appearing on the permanent 
record, and they may add any course 
that is not closed. Students wishing to 
drop a course between the fifth day 
and the 12th week of classes must 
secure a withdrawal form from the 
Office of the Registrar, which is 
presented to the instructor of the 
course in question, who assigns a 
withdrawal grade based on the level 
of the student's performance from 
the beginning of the course to the 
date of withdrawal. Withdrawal 
grades are not computed in the grade 
point average. Students may not 
withdraw from courses after the 12th 



week of a semester and the com- 
parable period during the May and 
summer terms. 

In two-credit (Vi unit) courses 
meeting only during the last half of 
any semester, students may drop / 
add for a period of five days, effec- 
tive with the mid-term date shown on 
the academic calendar. Withdrawal 
from half-semester courses with a 
withdrawal grade may occur within 
six weeks of the beginning of the 
course. It is understood that the 
period of time at the beginning of the 
semester and at the mid-point of the 
semester will be identical; for exam- 
ple, a period of five days as indicated 
above. 

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is 
organized, with few exceptions, on a 
departmental basis. Most courses are 
unit courses, meaning that each 
course taken is considered to be 
equivalent to four semester hours of 
credit. Exceptions occur in applied 
music courses, which are offered for 
either one-half or one semester hour 
of credit, and in departments that 
have elected to offer certain courses 
for the equivalent of two semester 
hours of credit. Further, independent 
studies and internships carrying two 
semester hours of credit may be 
designed. The normal student course 
load is four courses during the fall 
and spring semesters. Students who 
elect to attend the special sessions 
may enroll in one course during the 
May term and one or two courses in 
the summer term. A student is con- 
sidered full time when enrolled for a 
minimum of three courses during the 
fall or spring semesters, one course 
for the May term, and two courses 
for the summer term. Students may 
enroll in five courses during the fall 
and spring semesters if they are 
Lycoming Scholars or were admitted 
to the Dean's List at the end of the 
previous semester. Exceptions may be 
granted by the Dean of the College. 
Overloads are not permitted during 
the May and summer terms. 



THE SYSTEM OF GRADING AND 
REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student perfor- 
mance in credit courses is indicated 
by the use of traditional letter sym- 
bols. These symbols and their defini- 
tions are as follows: 

A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of con- 
tent or skills and demonstration of 
creative and independent thinking. 
B High Pass — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the stu- 
dent reveals insight and understand- 
ing. 

C Pass — Signifies satisfactory 
achievement wherein the student's 
work has been of average quality and 
quantity. The student has 
demonstrated basic competence in the 
subject area and may enroll in addi- 
tional course work. 
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfac- 
tory achievement wherein the student 
met only the minimum requirements 
for passing the course and should not 
continue in the subject area without 
departmental advice. 
F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum re- 
quirements for passing the course. 
I Incomplete Work — Assigned in ac- 
cordance with the restrictions of 
established academic policy. 
R A Repeated Course — Students 
shall have the option of repeating 
courses for which they already have 
received a passing grade in addition 
to those which they have failed. No 
credit is received for the second at- 
tempt. Grades will be averaged. 
S Passing Work, no grade assigned — 
Converted from traditional grade of 
D or better. 

U Failing work, no grade assigned. — 
Converted from traditonal grade of 
F. 

X Audit — Work as an auditor for 
which no credit is earned. 
W Withdrawal — Signifies 
withdrawal from the course early in 
the term when it cannot be determin- 
ed that the student is passing or fail- 
ing. 



WP Withdrawal, passing — The stu- 
dent was passing at the time of 
withdrawal; no credit is earned. 
WP Withdrawal, failing — The stu- 
dent was failing at the time of 
withdrawal; no credit is earned. 

Use of the satisfactory / unsatisfac- 
tory grading option is limited as 
follows (this does not apply to 
English 1): 

— students may enroll on an S / 
U basis in no more than one 
course per semester and no 
more than four courses during 
their undergraduate career. 

— S / U courses completed after 
declaration of the major may 
not be used to satisfy a re- 
quirement of that major, in- 
cluding courses required by 
the major department which 
are offered by other depart- 
ments. (Instructor-designated 
courses are excepted from this 
limitation.) 

— courses for which a grade of S 
is recorded may not be used 
toward fulfillment of any 
distribution requirement. 

— students may not enroll in 
English 2 on an S / U basis. 

— a course selected on an S / U 
basis which is subsequently 
withdrawn will not count 
toward the four-course limit. 

— instructor-designated courses 
may be offered during the 
May term with the approval of 
the Dean of the College. Such 
courses are not counted 
toward the four-course limit. 

— S / U grades are not computed 
in the grade point average. 

— students electing the S / U op- 
tion may designate a minimum 
acceptance letter grade of A or 
B. If the letter grade actually 
earned by the student equals 
or exceeds this minimum, that 
letter grade is entered on the 
student's permanent record 
and is computed in the grade 
point average. In such a case, 
the course does not count 



toward the four-course limit. 
If the student does not indicate 
a minimum acceptable letter 
grade or if the letter grade ac- 
tually earned is lower than the 
minimum designated by the 
student, the Registrar 
substitutes an S for any pass- 
ing grade (A, B, C, or D) and a 
U for an F grade. 

— students must declare the S / 
U option before the end of the 
period during which courses 
may be added during any 
given semester, half-semester, 
or term. 

— instructors are not notified 
which of their students are 
enrolled on an S / U basis. 

— students electing the S / U op- 
tion are expected to perform 
the same work as those enroll- 
ed on a regular basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given if, 
for absolutely unavoidable reasons 
(usually medical in nature), the stu- 
dent has not been able to complete 
the work requisite to the course. An 
incomplete grade must be removed 
within six weeks of the next regular 
semester. 

Students shall have the option of 
repeating courses for which they 
already have received a passing grade 
in addition to those which they have 
failed. Recording of grades for all 
repeated courses shall be governed by 
the following conditions: 

— a course may be repeated only 
one time. 

— both attempts will be recorded 
on the student's transcript. 

— credit for the course will be 
given only once. 

— for the purpose of determining 
the student's G.P.A., the 
average grade received for the 
two attempts will be used as if 
it were the grade for a single 
course. 

— a repeated course will be 
counted toward the total 
number of unsuccessful at- 
tempts. 



ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming 
is based upon the assumption that 
there is value in class attendance for 
all students. Individual instructors 
have the prerogative of establishing 
reasonable absence regulations in any 
course. The student is responsible for 
learning and observing these regula- 
tions. 

STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educa- 
tional records is designed to protect 
the privacy of students against un- 
warranted intrusions and is consistent 
with Section 438 of the General 
Education Provision Act (commonly 
known as the Family Educational 
Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as 
amended). The details of the College 
policy on student records and the pro- 
cedures for gaining access to student 
records are contained in the current 
issue of The Pathfinder, which is 
available in the library and the Office 
of the Dean of the College. 

ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of 
hours completed or cumulative grade 
point average falls below the follow- 
ing standards: 

Semester Hours Cumulative 

(Full-time) Completed GPA 

1 12 1.66 

2 24 1.85 

3 40 1 .90 

4 56 2.00 

5 72 2.00 

6 88 2.00 

7 104 2.00 

8 120 2.00 

In order to meet graduation re- 
quirements, students must complete 
128 credit hours. Students who are 
enrolled part-time or for fewer than 
the normal four courses per term will 
be expected to complete an equivalent 
proportion of their program each 
semester. 



10 



Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 

— can not achieve good standing 
by the end of summer term; 

— are on probation for two con- 
secutive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average 
of 1.00 or below during any 
one semester. 

Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 

— can not reasonably complete 
all requirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of 
unsuccessful course attempts 
(grades of F, U, W, WP, WF, 
and R) except in the case of 
withdrawal for medical or 
psychological reasons. 

The integrity of the academic pro- 
cess of the College requires honesty in 
all phases of the instructional pro- 
gram. The College assumes that 
students are committed to the princi- 
ple of academic honesty. Students 
who fail to honor this commitment 
are subject to dismissal. Procedural 
guidelines and rules for the adjudica- 
tion of cases of academic dishonesty 
are printed in The Faculty Handbook 
and The Pathfinder (the student 
academic handbook), copies of which 
are available in the library. 

CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering 
freshmen who have completed an ad- 
vanced course while in secondary 
school and who have taken the ap- 
propriate advanced-placement ex- 
amination of the College Entrance 
Examination Board (CEEB) are en- 
couraged to apply for credit and ad- 
vanced placement at the time of ad- 
mission. A grade of three or above is 
considered satisfactory. 

College Level Examination Pro- 
gram (CLEP) — Students may earn 
college credit for superior achieve- 
ment through CLEP. By achieving at 
the 75th percentile or above on the 
General Examinations and the 65th 
percentile or above on approved Sub- 



ject Examinations, students may earn 
up to 50 percent of the course re- 
quirements for a bachelor of arts 
degree. Although these examinations 
may be taken after enrollment, new 
students who are competent in a given 
area are encouraged to take the ex- 
aminations of their choice during the 
second semester of their senior year 
so that Lycoming will have the test 
scores available for registration ad- 
visement for the first semester of 
enrollment. Further information 
about CLEP may be obtained 
through the secondary-school 
guidance office or the Office of Ad- 
missions at Lycoming College. 

ACADEMIC HONORS 

Dean's List — Students are admitted 
to the Dean's List at the end of the 
fall and spring semesters if they have 
completed at least four courses with 
other than S / U grades, and have a 
minimum grade point average of 3.50 
for the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students 
are awarded the bachelor of arts 
degree, the bachelor of fine arts 
degree, or the bachelor of science in 
nursing degree with honors when they 
have earned the following grade point 
averages based on all courses attemp- 
ted, including courses transferred 
from other institutions to Lycoming: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 
achievement is recognized through 
the conferring of awards and prizes at 
the annual Honors Day convocation 
and Commencement and through 
election to membership in honor 
societies. 

Societies 

Blue Key Freshman Men 

Gold Key Freshman Women 

Beta Beta Beta Biology 

Omicron Delta 

Epsilon Economics 

Phi Alpha Theta History 



Phi Sigma Tau Philosophy 

Sigma Pi Sigma Physics 

Pi Sigma 

Alpha Political Science 

Psi Chi Psychology 

Pi Gamma Mu ....Social Science 

Phi Kappa Phi General 

Academic 
Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Society Award 

— The award, sponsored by the Sus- 
quehanna Valley Chapter of the 
society, is given to the outstanding 
senior in chemistry who plans to enter 
the profession. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize 

— The prize, given by the 
Philadelphia section of the institute, 
goes to the senior major for ex- 
cellence in chemistry. 

Bryon C. Brunstetter Science A ward 

— The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and 
biological sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
A ward — The award is given to the 
freshman who has exhibited out- 
standing academic achievement in 
chemistry. 

Chieftain Award — Given by Lycom- 
ing, the College's most prestigious 
award is given to the senior who has 
contributed most to Lycoming 
through support of school activities; 
who has exhibited outstanding leader- 
ship qualities; who has worked effec- 
tively with other members of the col- 
lege community; who has evidenced a 
good moral code; and whose 
academic rank is above the median 
for the preceding senior class. 

Civic Choir Award — The award, 
sponsored by the College choir, is 
given to the choir member who has 
outstanding musical ability and who 
has made significant leadership con- 
tributions to the choir. 

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior who has been 
outstanding in the promotion of col- 
lege spirit through participation in 
athletics and other activities. 



11 



Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The 
prize is given to the graduating stu- 
dent who has done outstanding work 
in mathematics. 

Durkheim Award — The award is 
given to the senior sociology / an- 
thropology major who has done 
outstanding work in the field. 

Bishop William Perry Eve/and Prize 
— Sponsored by the College, the prize 
is given to the senior who has shown 
progress in scholarship, loyalty, 
school spirit, and participation in 
school activities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — Sponsored by the Art 
Department, the award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this 
field. 

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — Sponsored by the Art 
Department, the award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this 
field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
A ward — Sponsored by the Theatre 
Department, the award is given to the 
student who has been outstanding as 
a performer in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre 
A ward — Sponsored by the Theatre 
Department, the award is given to the 
student who has been outstanding as 
a technician for the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science A ward 
— Given by the Political Science 
Department, the award goes to the 
senior political science major who has 
performed with excellence. 

J. W. Ferree Award — Given by the 
Mathematical Sciences Department in 
memory of the first mathematics pro- 
fessor at Lycoming's forerunner, the 
Dickinson Seminary, the award goes 
to the student most active in 
mathematical sciences. 

Faculty Prize — Sponsored by 
Lycoming, the prize is given to the 
commuting student with satisfactory 
scholarship and who has been 

12 



outstanding in promotion of school 
spirit through participation in school 
activities. 

Durant L. Furey III Memorial Prize 
— The prize is given to the senior ac- 
counting major who has shown 
outstanding achievement in accoun- 
ting. 

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the French, 
German, and Spanish majors who 
have achieved excellence in foreign 
languages. 

John P. Graham A ward — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the 
award is given to the senior English 
major who achieves the highest 
average in English. 

Edward J. Gray Prizes — Sponsored 
by Lycoming, the prizes are given to 
the graduating students with the 
highest and second highest averages. 

Dan Gustafson A ward — In memory 
of a former member of the English 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior English major whose analytical 
writing demonstrates the highest stan- 
dards of literary and critical ex- 
cellence. 

1 RUSK A Awards — The awards 
denote membership in the society for 
juniors who are very active on cam- 
pus; they are given by the Office of 
Student Services. 

Junior Book A ward — Sponsored by 
the Political Science Department, the 
award is given to the outstanding 
junior political science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The 
prize is given to the senior 
mathematics major with outstanding 
achievement in the field. 

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, 
business administration, and 
economics majors who show the 
greatest proficiency in statistics; the 
mathematics major who shows the 
greatest proficiency in applied 
mathematics, and the graduating 



senior who shows the greatest profi- 
ciency in computer science. 

Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — 
The prize is given to the graduating 
student who has shown outstanding 
scholarship in legal principles. 

C. Daniel Little A ward — Sponsored 
by the Political Science Department, 
the prize is given to the outstanding 
student in public administration. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the senior ma- 
jors in mathematics, biology, 
chemistry, physics, philosophy, and 
psychology who have attained the 
highest averages. 

Walter J. Mclver A ward — Named 
after Lycoming's former choir direc- 
tor, the award is given to the choir 
member who has made outstanding 
campus contributions outside of 
choir. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified 
Public Accountants Award — The 
award is given to the senior accoun- 
ting major who has demonstrated 
high scholastic standing and qualities 
of leadership. 

Pocahontas Award — Sponsored by 
the Athletic Department, the award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding 
female athlete. 

Research and Writing Prize in 
History — Sponsored by the History 
Department, the prize is given to the 
student who does the best work in 
History 45. 

Sadler Prize — Sponsored by the 
Mathematical Sciences Department, 
the prize is given to the student with 
the highest achievement in calculus, 
foundations of mathematics, algebra, 
and analysis. 

Senior Management A ward — Spon- 
sored by the Business Administration 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior business major with the best 
senior project in Business Ad- 
ministration 41. 



Senior Scholarship Prize in History 
— The prize is given to the senior ma- 
jor with the highest average. 

Service to Lycoming A ward — Spon- 
sored by the Office of Student Ser- 
vices, the award is given to students 
who have made outstanding contribu- 
tions to Lycoming. 

Frances K. Skeath Award — Spon- 
sored by the Mathematical Sciences 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior with outstanding achievement 
in mathematics. 

John A . Streeter Memorial A ward in 
Economics — The award is given to 
the graduating student with outstand- 
ing achievement in economics. 

Tomahawk Award — Sponsored by 
the Athletic Department, the award is 
given to the outstanding male athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major 
who has done outstanding work in 
the field. 

Wall Street Journal A ward — Spon- 
sored by the Business Administration 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior business major for excellence 
in the field and service to the College 
community. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award— Spon- 
sored by the Athletic Department, the 
award is given to the junior athlete 
who has shown the most improve- 
ment. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — 
The scholarship is given to the junior 
woman student who has shown 
satisfactory scholarship, outstanding 
school spirit, and who is active in 
campus activities. 



Department Honors — Honors pro- 
jects are normally undertaken only in 
a student's major, and are available 
only to exceptionally well-qualified 
students who have a solid back- 
ground in the area of the project and 
are capable of considerable self- 
direction. The prerequisites for 



registration in an honors program are 
as follows: 

— a faculty member from the 
department(s) in which the 
honors project is to be under- 
taken must agree to be the 
director and must secure 
departmental approval of the 
project. 

— the director, in consultation 
with the student, must con- 
vene a committee consisting 
of two faculty members from 
the department in which the 
project is to be undertaken, 
one of whom is the director 
of the project, and one facul- 
ty member from each of two 
other departments related to 
the subject matter of the 
study. 

— the honors committee must 
then certify by their 
signatures on the application 
that the project in question is 
academically legitimate and 
worthy of pursuit as an 
honors project, and that the 
student in question is 
qualified to pursue the pro- 
ject. 

— the project must be approved 
by the Committee on In- 
dividual Studies. 

Students successfully complete 
honors projects by satisfying the 
following conditions in accordance 
with guidelines established by the 
Committee on Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a 
substantial research paper, 
critical study, or creative 
project. If the end product is 
a creative project, a critical 
paper analyzing the techni- 
ques and principles employed 
and the nature of the 
achievement represented in 
the project shall be submit- 
ted. 

— the student must successfully 
explain and defend the work 
in a final oral examination 



given by the honors commit- 
tee. 

— the honors committee must 
certify that the student has 
successfully defended the 
project, and that the 
student's achievement is 
clearly superior to that which 
would ordinarily be required 
to earn a grade of "A" in a 
regular independent-studies 
course. 

— the Committee on Individual 
Studies must certify that the 
student has satisfied all of 
the conditions mentioned 
above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, 
honors projects are expected to in- 
volve independent study in two con- 
secutive unit courses. Successful com- 
pletion of the honors project will 
cause the designation of honors in 
that department to be placed upon 
the permanent record. Acceptable 
theses are deposited in the College 
library. In the event that the study is 
not completed successfully or is not 
deemed worthy of honors, the stu- 
dent shall be re-registered in indepen- 
dent studies and given a final grade 
for the course. 

SPECIAL FEATURES 

Independent Studies — Indepen- 
dent studies are available to any 
qualified student who wishes to 
engage in and receive academic credit 
for any academically legitimate 
course of study for which he or she 
could not otherwise receive credit. It 
may be pursued at any level (in- 
troductory, intermediate, or advanc- 
ed) and in any department, whether 
or not the student is a major in that 
department. Studies projects which 
duplicate catalog courses are 
sometimes possible, and are subject 
to the same provisions which apply to 
all studies projects. In order for a stu- 
dent to be registered in an 
independent-study course, the follow- 
ing conditions must be satisfied: 

— an appropriate member of 
the faculty must agree to 

13 



supervise the project and 
must certify by signing the 
application form that the 
project is academically 
legitimate and involves an 
amount of work appropriate 
for the amount of academic 
credit requested, and that the 
student in question is 
qualified to pursue the pro- 
ject. 

— the studies project must be 
approved by the chairman of 
the department in which the 
studies project is to be under- 
taken. 

— after the project is approved 
by the instructor and by the 
chairman of the appropriate 
department, the studies pro- 
ject must be approved by the 
Committee on Individual 
Studies. 

In addition, participation in 
independent-studies projects, with 
the exception of those which 
duplicate catalog courses, is subject 
to the following: 

— students may not engage in 
more than one independent- 
studies project during any 
given semester. 

— students may not engage in 
more than two independent- 
studies projects during their 
academic career at Lycoming 
College. 

As with other academic policies, 
any exceptions to these two rules 
must be approved by the Academic 
Standing Committee. 

Internship Program — An intern- 
ship is a course jointly sponsored by 
the College and a public or private 
agency or subdivision of the College 
in which a student is enabled to earn 
college credit by participating in some 
active capacity as an assistant, aide, 
or apprentice. At least one-half of the 
effort expended by the intern should 
consist of academic work related to 
agency situations. The objectives of 
the internship program are (1) to fur- 

14 



ther the development of a central core 
of values, awarenesses, strategies, 
skills, and information through ex- 
periences outside the classroom or 
other campus situations, and (2) to 
facilitate the integration of theory 
and practice by encouraging students 
to relate their on-campus academic 
experiences more directly to society in 
general and to possible career and 
other post-baccalaureate objectives in 
particular. 

Any junior or senior student in 
good academic standing may petition 
the Committee on Individual Studies 
for approval to serve as an intern. A 
maximum of 16 credits can be earned 
through the internship program. 
Guidelines for program development, 
assignment of tasks and academic re- 
quirements, such as exams, papers, 
reports, grades, etc., are established 
in consulation with a faculty director 
at Lycoming and an agency super- 
visor at the place of internship. 

Students with diverse majors have 
participated in a wide variety of in- 
ternships, including those with the 
Allenwood Federal Prison Camp, 
Lycoming County Commissioners 
Office, Department of Environmen- 
tal Resources, Head Start, Lycoming 
County Historical Society, business 
and accounting firms, law offices, 
hospitals, social service agencies, 
banks, and congressional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a 
four-week voluntary session designed 
to provide students with courses listed 
in the catalog and experimental and 
special courses that are not normally 
available during the fall and spring 
semesters and summer term. Some 
courses are offered on campus; others 
involve travel. A number offer inter- 
disciplinary credit. Illustrations of the 
types of courses offered during the 
May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural Tours of 
Germany, Spain, France, Ireland, 
and the United Kingdom; Ar- 
chaeological Expeditions to the Mid- 
dle East; Oceanographic Expeditions 
in Bermuda; Literature of the Sea on 



location in the Caribbean; An- 
thropological Expeditions to New 
Mexico to study tri-cultural com- 
munities; Utopian Communities; 
Photography Workshops in Ver- 
mont; Revolutionary and Civil War 
Sites. 

(b) On-Campus: Financial State- 
ment Analysis, Silk-screeen Printing, 
Field Geology, History of 
Astronomy, Field Ornithology, 
Chemical Analysis, Managing the 
Small Business, Women in Manage- 
ment, Energy Economics, Public 
School Curriculum, Writer's 
Seminar, Modern American Humor, 
The Norman Kingdom, Practical 
Logic, Psychology of Group Pro- 
cesses, Ancient Near East Religion, 
Juvenile Delinquency. 

Although participation in the May 
term is voluntary, student response 
has been outstanding with approx- 
imate 25 to 30 percent of the student 
body enrolling. In addition to the 
courses themselves, attractions in- 
clude small and informal classes and 
reduced tuition rates. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under 
auspices of approved universities and 
agencies. While study abroad is par- 
ticularly attractive to students major- 
ing in foreign languages and lit- 
eratures, this opportunity is open to 
all students in good academic stan- 
ding. Mastery of a foreign language is 
desirable but not required in all pro- 
grams. A file of opportunities is 
available in the library. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannol assume 
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare 
of any student engaged in or en route to or 
from any off-campus study or activity not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 

Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth 
tuition per course. Laboratory and 
other special fees must be paid in full. 
Examinations, papers, and other 
evaluation devices are not required of 
auditors, but individual arrangements 
may be made to complete such 
exercises with the consent of the 



instructor. The option to audit a 
course must be declared during the 
same period (currently five days) at 
the beginning of each semester, half- 
semester, or term as drop/add and 
pass/fail and must be completed in 
the Registrar's Office. 

Part-Time Students — Any person 
may take up to two courses during 
any semester or summer term (one in 
May term). Part-time special students 
pay the $15 application fee for the 
first registration and the part-time 
tuition rate in effect at the time of 
each enrollment. 

COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several 
cooperative programs to provide 
students with opportunities to extend 
their knowledge, abilities, and talents 
in selected areas through access to the 
specialized academic programs and 
facilities of other colleges, univer- 
sities, academies, and hospitals. 
Although thorough advisement and 
curricular planning are provided for 
each of the cooperative programs, ad- 
mission to Lycoming and registration 
in the program of choice does not 
guarantee admission to the 
cooperating institution. The 
prerogative of admitting students to 
the cooperative aspect of the program 
rests with the cooperating institution. 
Students who are interested in a 
cooperative program should contact 
the coordinator during the first week 
of the first semester of their enroll- 
ment at Lycoming. This is necessary 
to plan their course programs in a 
manner that will insure completion of 
required courses according to the 
schedule stipulated for the program. 
All cooperative programs require 
special coordination of course 
scheduling at Lycoming. 

Engineering — Combining the ad- 
vantages of a liberal-arts education 
and the technical training of an 
engineering curriculum, this program 
is offered in conjunction with 
Bucknell University and the Penn- 
sylvania State University. Students 



complete three years of study at 
Lycoming and two years at the 
cooperating university. Upon 
satisfactory completion of the first 
year of engineering studies, Lycom- 
ing awards the bachelor of arts 
degree. When students successfully 
complete the second year of engineer- 
ing studies, the cooperating university 
awards the bachelor of science degree 
in engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete 
the distribution program and courses 
in physics, mathematics, and 
chemistry. Engineering specialties of- 
fered at Bucknell University include 
chemical, civil, electrical, and 
mechanical. The Pennsylvania State 
University offers aerospace, 
agricultural, chemical, civil, elec- 
trical, engineering science, en- 
vironmental, industrial, mechanical, 
and nuclear engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies 

— Lycoming College offers a 
cooperative program with Duke 
University in environmental manage- 
ment and forestry. Qualified students 
can earn the bachelor's and master's 
degrees in five years, spending three 
years at Lycoming and two years at 
Duke. All Lycoming distribution and 
major requirements must be com- 
pleted by the end of the junior year. 
At the end of the first year at Duke, 
the B.A. degree will be awarded by 
Lycoming. Duke will award the pro- 
fessional degree of Master of Forestry 
or Master of Environmental Manage- 
ment to qualified candidates at the 
end of the second year. 

The major program emphases at 
Duke are Natural Resources 
Science/Ecology, Natural Resources 
Systems Science, and Natural 
Resources Economics/Policy. The 
program is flexible enough, however, 
to accommodate a variety of in- 
dividual designs. An undergraduate 
major in one of the natural sciences, 
social sciences, or business may pro- 
vide good preparation for the pro- 
grams at Duke, but a student with 
any undergraduate concentration will 
be considered for admission. All 



students need at least two courses 
each in biology, mathematics, and 
economics. 

Students begin the program at 
Duke in July after their junior year at 
Lycoming with a one-month session 
of field work in natural resource 
measurements. They must complete a 
total of 60 units which generally takes 
four semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete 
the bachelor's degree before under- 
taking graduate study at Duke. The 
master's degree requirements for 
these students are the same as for 
those students entering after the 
junior year, but the 60-unit require- 
ment may be reduced for completed 
relevant undergraduate work of 
satisfactory quality. All credit reduc- 
tions are determined individually and 
consider the student's educational 
background and objectives. 

Medical Technology — Students 
desiring a career in medical 
technology may either complete a 
bachelor of arts program followed by 
a clinical internship at any American 
Medical Association — accredited 
hospital, or they may complete the 
cooperative program. Students elec- 
ting the cooperative program normal- 
ly study for three years at Lycoming, 
during which time they complete 24 
unit courses, including the College 
distribution requirements, a major, 
and requirements of the National Ac- 
crediting Agency for Clinical 
Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). The 
current requirements of the NAACLS 
are: four courses in chemistry (one of 
which must be either organic or 
biochemistry); four courses in 
biology (including courses in 
microbiology and immunology), and 
one course in mathematics. 

Students in the cooperative pro- 
gram usually major in biology, 
following a modified major of six 
unit courses that exempts them from 
Ecology (Biology 24) and Plant 
Sciences (Biology 25). Students must 
take either Animal Physiology 
(Biology 23) or Cell Physiology 



15 



(Biology 35). The cooperative pro- 
gram requires successful completion 
of a one-year internship at an 
American Medical Association — ac- 
credited hospital. Lycoming is af- 
filiated with the following accredited 
hospitals: Williamsport, Divine 
Providence, Robert Packer, Lan 
caster, and Abington. Students in the 
cooperative program receive credit at 
Lycoming for each of eight unit 
courses in biology and chemistry suc- 
cessfully completed during the 
clinical internship. Successful com- 
pletion of the Registry Examination is 
not considered a graduation require- 
ment at Lycoming College. 

Students entering a clinical intern- 
ship for one year after graduation 
from Lycoming must complete all of 
the requirements of the cooperative 
program, but are not eligible for the 
biology major exemptions indicated 
above. Upon graduation, such 
students may apply for admission to a 
clinical program at any hospital. 



Nuclear Medicine Technology — 

Students desiring a career in nuclear 
medicine technology may complete 
either 1) a bachelor of arts program 
followed by a clinical internship, or 2) 
the cooperative program. 

Students enrolling in the 
cooperativev program in Nuclear 
Medicine Technology will study for 
three years at Lycoming, followed by 
a fourth year of prescribed study at a 
cooperating hospital. Students must 
apply directly to a cooperating 
hospital for admission to the clinical 
year. Lycoming College is presently 
affiliated with the Williamsport 
Hospital Department of Nuclear 
Medicine. The courses completed 
during the clinical year are entered on 
the Lycoming College transcript. 
Upon successful completion of the 
clinical year, which serves to com- 
plete the College degree re- 
quirements, students are eligible to 
take a certification examination in 
nuclear medicine technology. Suc- 
cessful completion of a certifying ex- 

16 



amination is not a graduation re- 
quirement at Lycoming College. 

Students may enter the cooperative 
program with backgrounds in dif- 
ferent fields of study. However, they 
must complete 24 units, including the 
College distribution requirements, a 
major, and the following re- 
quirements of the Joint Review Com- 
mittee on Education Programs of the 
American Medical Association: 
Anatomy and Physiology (Biology 
5-6 or 10-11), Basic Physics 
(Astronomy/Physics 15-16 or 25-26), 
Basic Mathematical Sciences (two 
courses from Math 9, 13, 17, 18, 19, 
Computer Science 15), Oral and 
Written Communication (Mass Com- 
munication 1 1 and English 2), and 
General Chemistry (two courses from 
Chemistry 10 [or 8], 11, 15 [or 20]). If 
Computer Science 15 has not been 
taken as a basic math option, it is 
highly recommended as an elective. 

For students in the cooperative 
program, modified majors are 
presently available in Biology and 
Physics. Students who wish to major 
in another academic discipline shall 
consult with their advisors early in 
their college careers to determine 
whether a major in a given discipline 
can be completed within a three-year 
period. 

Those who wish to major in 
Biology are allowed a modified major 
of six Biology courses (Biology 5-6 or 
10-11, 21, 22, 23 or 35, and an ad- 
vanced elective, along with the usual 
requirement in Chemistry and 
Mathematical Sciences. Those who 
wish to major in Physics are required 
to take the following courses: 
Astronomy/Physics 25, 26, 27, 29, a 
course in Nuclear and Particle 
Physics, and two elective physics 
courses numbered 1 1 or above, 
Biology 5-6 or 10-11, Mathematics 18 
and 19, and one year in chemistry. 



Optometry — Through the Ac- 
celerated Optometry Education Cur- 
riculum Program, students interested 
in a career in optometry may qualify 



for admission to the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry after only three 
years at Lycoming College. After 
four years at the Pennsylvania Col- 
lege of Optometry, a student will earn 
a Doctor of Optometry degree. Selec- 
tion of candidates for the profes- 
sional segment of the program is 
completed by the admissions commit- 
tee of the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry during the student's third 
year at Lycoming. (This is one of two 
routes that students may choose. Any 
student, of course, may follow the 
regular application procedures for 
admission to the Pennsylvania Col- 
lege of Optometry or another college 
of optometry to matriculate follow- 
ing completion of his or her bac- 
calaureate program.) During the 
three years at Lycoming College, the 
student will complete 24 unit courses, 
including all distribution re- 
quirements, and will prepare for his 
or her professional training by ob- 
taining a solid foundation in biology, 
chemistry, physics, and mathematics. 
During the first year of study at the 
Pennsylvania College of Optometry, 
the student will take 39 semester 
hours of basic science courses in addi- 
tion to introductions to optometry 
and health care. Successful comple- 
tion of the first year of professional 
training will complete the course re- 
quirements for the B.A. degree at 
Lycoming College. 

Most students will find it conve- 
nient to major in biology in order to 
satisfy the requirements of Lycoming 
College and the Pennsylvania College 
of Optometry. Such students are 
allowed to complete a modified 
biology major which will exempt 
them from two biology courses: 
Ecology (Bio. 24) and Plant Sciences 
(Bio. 25). (This modified major re- 
quires the successful completion of 
the initial year at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry). Students 
desiring other majors must coor- 
dinate their plans with the Health 
Professions Advisory Committee in 
order to insure that they have 
satisfied all requirements. 



Podiatry — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to 
a college of podiatric medicine upon 
completion of the bachelor of arts 
degree or through the Accelerated 
Podiatric Medical Education- 
Curriculum Program (APMEC). The 
latter program provides an oppor- 
tunity for students to qualify for ad- 
mission to the Pennsylvania College 
of Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the 
Ohio College of Podiatric Medicine 
(OCPM) after three years of study at 
Lycoming. At Lycoming, students in 
the APMEC program must success- 
fully complete 24 unit courses, in- 
cluding the distribution program and 
a basic foundation in biology, 
chemistry, physics, and mathematics. 
During the first year of study at 
PCPM or OCPM, students must suc- 
cessfully complete a program of basic 
science courses and an introduction 
to podiatry. Successful completion of 
the first year of professional training 
will contribute toward the fulfillment 
of the course requirements for the 
bachelor of arts degree at Lycoming. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical 
Institute of Sculpture in Princeton, 
New Jersey, offers a BFA degree in 
sculpture. It uses a classical appren- 
ticeship approach as its teaching 
method. This ancient method of 
teaching is combined at Johnson with 
the most modern and technically ad- 
vanced foundry and fabricating 
techniques. 

The Art Department offers a syn- 
thesis program that interrelates the 
student experience at both institu- 
tions. This is achieved by having the 
student rotate between Lycoming and 
the atelier so that each form of educa- 
tion is preparation for the other. 
Lycoming offers a core academic pro- 
gram, a course of study in the Art 
Department, and elective course op- 
portunities. Lycoming gives eight 
course units of college credit to the 
student for having successfully com- 
pleted one of the apprenticeship pro- 
grams at the Johnson Atelier. 



All work completed by the student 
at Lycoming by the end of the 
sophomore year will be applicable to 
a bachelor of arts degree with a major 
in art should the student decide to 
withdraw from the BFA program. If 
the student should withdraw from the 
cooperative program prior to com- 
pleting the apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier, Lycoming will give 
up to four units of credit or one 
semester's work for the internship. If, 
however, the student completes more 
work at the atelier than the four 
units, that extra work will not be 
credited to the bachelor of arts 
degree; it will only be used as part of 
the bachelor of fine arts degree, and 
then only if the course at the atelier is 
completed. 

This course of study is very 
rigorous. It will require that the stu- 
dent be involved almost continuous- 
ly, either at Lycoming or at the 
Johnson Atelier, during the four 
years it will take to complete the 
degree. (See Art Department listing 
for specific program.) 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program 
provides a voluntary opportunity for 
Lycoming students to enroll on a 
non-credit basis in the Bucknell 
Universtiy R.O.T.C. unit. Lycoming 
notes enrollment in and successful 
completion of the program on stu- 
dent transcripts. Military Science is a 
four-year program divided into a 
basic course given during the 
freshman and sophomore years and 
an advanced course given during the 
junior and senior years. Students who 
have not completed the basic course 
may qualify for the advanced course 
by completing summer camp between 
the sophomore and junior years. 
Students enrolled in the advanced 
course receive a monthly stipend of 
$100 for up to 10 months a year. 
Students successfully completing the 
advanced course and advanced sum- 
mer camp between the junior and 
senior years will qualify for a com- 
mission as a Second Lieutenant in the 



United States Army upon graduation, 
and will incur a service obligation in 
the active Army or Army Reserves. 
The only expense to the student for 
this program is the $60 basic and ad- 
vanced course deposits payable to 
Bucknell. 

Student Enrichment Semester — 

This voluntary program is designed to 
expand academic and life oppor- 
tunities for students and to provide 
for participation in specialized pro- 
grams and courses not available at 
Lycoming. Other members of the 
program are Bucknell and Sus- 
quehanna Universities, the 
Williamsport Area Community Col- 
lege, and Bloomsburg, Lock Haven, 
and Mansfield State Colleges. 
Students other than freshmen enroll 
full or part time for credit, normally 
for one semester or term, at any par- 
ticipating institution in selected 
courses. Students in the program re- 
main fully enrolled as degree can- 
didates at their home institutions. A 
special opportunity within the pro- 
gram is the cross-registration arrange- 
ment with the Williamsport Area 
Community College, whereby 
students may enroll for less than a 
full-time course load while remaining 
enrolled in courses at Lycoming. 

Washington, United Nations, Lon- 
don and Harrisburg Urban Semesters 

— With the consent of the Depart- 
ment of Political Science, selected 
students are permitted to study in 
Washington, D.C., at The American 
University for one semester. They 
may choose from seven different pro- 
grams: Washington Semester, Urban 
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, 
International Development Semester, 
Economic Policy Semester, Science 
and Technology Semester, American 
Studies Semester. 

With the consent of either the 
Department of History or Political 
Science, selected students may enroll 
at Drew University in Madison, New 
Jersey, in the United Nations 
Semester, which is designed to pro- 
vide a first-hand acquaintance with 



17 



the world organization. Students with 
special interests in world history, in- 
ternational relations, law, and 
politics are eligible to participate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics, 
and culture. Interested students par- 
ticipate with the consent of either the 
Departments of History or Political 
Science. 

The Harrisburg Urban Semester 
(THUS) is a project of the Central 
Pennsylvania Consortium: Dickin- 
son, Franklin & Marshall, and 
Gettysburg Colleges. THUS is a one- 
semester off-campus academic intern- 
ship program designed for students 
who wish to participate in a career- 
oriented internship experience while 
exploring the social, economic, and 
political problems which our states 
and cities face. THUS students, in 
most cases, receive a full semester's 
academic credit by working 25 hours 
a week in their internship, writing a 
substantial analytical paper re- 
lated to the internship, and taking 
two academic seminars — one in ur- 
ban affairs and one in a more 
specialized area. Opportunities for in- 
dependent study are also available. 
The 20 students in the program 
each semester live near one another in 
apartments or houses available 
through THUS, and students spend a 
great deal of time together sharing 
their common experiences in an infor- 
mal and sometimes intense manner. 
Students will receive academic credit 
from the Franklin & Marshall Col- 
lege. The internship is graded on a 
pass/fail basis. 

Normally the above special- 
semester programs are open only to 
juniors. 



Lycoming College cannot assume responsibili- 
ty for the health, safety, or welfare of students 
engaged in or en route to or from any off- 
campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 



THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Pro- 
gram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of 
highly motivated students of superior 
intellectual ability. The Lycoming 
Scholar satisfies the general distribu- 
tion requirements, but on a more ex- 
acting level and with more challeng- 
ing courses than the average student. 
Lycoming Scholars also participate in 
special courses and seminars and in 
serious independent study cul- 
minating in a senior project super- 
vised by their major department. 

Students are admitted to the pro- 
gram by invitation of the Scholar 
Council, the group which oversees the 
program. The council consists of four 
students elected by current scholars 
and four faculty selected by the Dean 
of the College. The guidelines govern- 
ing selection of new scholars are flexi- 
ble: academic excellence, intellectual 
curiosity, and creativity are all taken 
into account. Students who desire to 
participate in the Scholar Program 
but are not invited may petition the 
Scholar Council for consideration. 

To remain in the program, students 
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or bet- 
ter. Students dropping below this 
average will be placed on Scholar pro- 
bation until their average improves, 
or they are asked to leave the pro- 
gram. To graduate as a Scholar, a 
student must have at least a 3.0 
cumulative average. Scholars must 
take the First Year Scholar Seminar 
during their first semester in the pro- 
gram. In addition, the following 
course requirements must be met. 

A. English. Scholars must display 
above-average writing skills by the 
end of the sophomore year, as cer- 
tified by the Department of English 
and the Scholar Council. This re- 
quirement may be met by obtaining a 
sufficiently high score on an ap- 
propriate CLEP examination or by a 
grade of "B" in English 2. Students 
not meeting the requirement in either 
of these ways by the end of the 
freshman year will be asked to do ex- 



tra work until the competency is 
reached. Beyond English 2, the re- 
quirement is one literature course 
numbered 20 or higher. 

B. Language/Mathematical 
Sciences. Scholars must satisfy the re- 
quirement in either language or 
mathematical sciences. Language: 
Scholars must complete two courses 
numbered 10 or higher (excluding 
courses taught in English). 
Mathematical Sciences: Two options 
are available in mathematics/com- 
puter science. Either Math 18 and 19, 
plus one course numbered 20 or 
higher (continous mathematics) or 
two courses chosen from Math 12, 
13, and Computer Science 15, plus 
one course numbered 20 or higher 
(discrete mathematics). By 
demonstrating higher competence on 
the Mathematics Placement Ex- 
amination, scholars may reduce the 
requirement to two units of 
mathematical science. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either 
of the two areas. Philosophy: Two 
courses numbered 20 or higher. 
Religion: Two courses numbered 22 
or higher. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy 
the requirement in one of four areas. 
Art: Two options are available in art. 
Either two courses taken from Art 22, 
23, 24, 31, 32, 33, and 34 (Art 
History), or two courses taken from 
Art 11, 15, 20, and 25 (Studio Art). 
Music: Two courses taken from 
Music 17, 30, or higher. Theatre: 
Two courses taken from Theatre 12 
or higher, excluding Theatre 18. 
Literature: Two literature courses 
taken from English 20 or higher, 
Foreign Languages and Literature 25, 
or other Foreign Language and 
Literature courses taught in English. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of 
three areas. Astronomy/Physics: 
Two courses numbered 1 1 or higher. 
Biology: Two courses numbered 10 or 
higher. Chemistry: Two courses 
numbered 10 or higher. 

F. History/Social Sciences. 



18 



Scholars must satisfy the re- 
quirements in one of five areas. 
Economics: Two courses numbered 
10 or higher. History: Two courses, 
one of which must be numbered 20 or 
higher. Political Science: Two courses 
numbered 15 or higher. Psychology: 
Two courses including Psychology 10 
and one course numbered 24 or 
higher (excluding Psychology 38). 
Sociology /Anthropology: Two 
courses including Sociology 10 and 
one course numbered 30 or higher 
(excluding Sociology 40). 

G. Physical Education. Scholars 
must satisfy the same physical educa- 
tion requirement stipulated by the 
College for all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition 
to completing the distribution re- 



quirements, Scholars will be required 
to complete four upper-level courses 
(numbered 30 and above) chosen 
from a list of "designated" courses 
selected and maintained by the 
Scholar Council. Each full-time 
Lycoming instructor is invited to 
nominate one of his/her courses hav- 
ing special depth and merit for inclu- 
sion on this list. The Scholar Council 
may alter the list from time to time. A 
scholar may use no more than two 
such designated courses from any one 
department to satisfy this require- 
ment. 

I. Senior Project. In the senior 
year, scholars must successfully com- 
plete an independent studies or 
departmental honors project which 
has been approved in advance by the 



Independent Studies Committee and 
the Scholar Council. This project 
must be presented orally and be ac- 
cepted by the Scholar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major 
and 32 units, exclusive of the First 
Year Scholar Seminar. 

K. In the case of transfer students 
and those who seek to enter the pro- 
gram after their freshman year and in 
other cases deemed by the Scholar 
Council to involve special or extraor- 
dinary circumstances, the Council 
shall have the right to grant excep- 
tions and make adjustments to the 
scholar distribution requirements 
provided that in all cases such excep- 
tions and adjustments would still 
satisfy the regular College distribu- 
tion requirements. 




19 



Curriculum 



Numbers 1-9 Elementary courses in 
departments where such courses 
are not counted as part of the stu- 
dent's major. 
Numbers 10-19 Freshman level 

courses 
Numbers 20-29 Sophomore level 

courses 
Numbers 30-39 Junior level courses 
Numbers 40-49 Senior level courses 
Numbers 50-59 Non-catalog courses 

(offered on a limited basis) 
Numbers 60-69 Applied Music 
Numbers 70-79 Internships 
Numbers 80-89 Independent Study 
Numbers 90-99 Independent Study 
for Department Honors 

Courses not in sequence are listed 
separately, as: 

Drawing Art 1 1 

Color Theory Art 12 

Courses which imply a sequence are 
indicted with a dash between, mean- 
ing that the first semester must be 
taken prior to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 10-11 

All students have the right of access 
to all courses. 

ACCOUNTING 

Professor: Richmond (Chairman) 
Assistant Professors: Kuhns, 

Wienecke 

The purpose of the accounting major 
is to help prepare the student for a 
career within the accounting profes- 
sion, whether public, private, or 
governmental, through a curriculum 
stressing pre-professional education. 

A major consists of Accounting 10, 
20-21, 30, 40, 41, 43, 45, 
Mathematics 13, Computer Science 
15, and one unit to be selected from 
Accounting 25, 26, 31,42,44,46,47, 
and 48 or Internship. Business 10 may 
be substituted for Accounting 10 if a 
student changes majors. Duplicate 
credit will not be granted. 

Students seeking entry into 
the public accounting field are ad- 
vised to investigate the professional 



requirements for certification in the 
state in which they intend to practice 
so that they may meet all educational 
requirements prior to graduation. All 
majors are advised to enroll in 
Economics 10 and 11, Business 35, 
36, and 38, and one of the following: 
Business 33, Economics 20, or 37. 

10 ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, 
classifying, summarizing, and inter- 
preting the basic business transaction. 
Problems of classification and interpreta- 
tion of accounts and preparation of finan- 
cial statements are studied. Prerequisite: 
Second-semester freshman or consent of 
instructor. 

20-21 INTERMEDIATE 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An intensive study of accounting 
statements and analytical procedures with 
an emphasis upon corporate accounts, 
various decision models, price-level 
models, earnings per share, pension ac- 
counting, accounting for leases, and 
financial statement analysis. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 10. 

25 FINANCIAL STATEMENT 
ANALYSIS 

Deals with the analysis of financial 
statements as an aid to decision making. 
The theme of the course is understanding 
the financial data which are analyzed as 
well as the methods by which they are 
analyzed and interpreted. This course 
should prove of value to all who need a 
thorough understanding of the uses to 
which financial statements are put as well 
as to those who must know how to use 
them intelligently and effectively. This in- 
cludes accountants, security analysts, 
lending officers, credit analysts, 
managers, and all others who make deci- 
sions on the basis of financial data. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10. 
May term. 

26 GOVERNMENT AND FUND 
ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce ac- 
counting for not-for-profit organizations. 
Municipal accounting and reporting are 
studied. Prerequisite: Accounting 10 or 
Business 10, one-half unit of credit. 

30-31 COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 
Methods of accounting for material, 
labor, and factory overhead expenses con- 
sumed in manufacturing using job order, 



process, and standard costing. Applica- 
tion of cost accounting and budgeting 
theory to decision making in the area of 
make or buy, expansion of production 
and sales, and accounting for control are 
dealt with. Prerequisite: Accounting 20 
or consent of instructor. 



40 AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and 
reports. The goal of the course is to em- 
phasize concepts which will enable 
students to understand the philosophy 
and environment of auditing. Special at- 
tention is given to the public accounting 
profession, studying auditing standards, 
professional ethics, the legal liability in- 
herent in the attest function, the study 
and evaluation of internal control, the 
nature of evidence, the growing use of 
statistical sampling, the impact of elec- 
tronic data processing, and the basic ap- 
proach to planning an audit. Finally, 
various audit reports expressing indepen- 
dent expert opinions on the fairness of 
financial statements are studied. Prereq- 
uisite: Accounting 21, Mathematics 13, 
and Computer Science 15. 

41 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ACCOUNTING AND PLANNING 
Analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to income deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting 
methods. Practical problems involving 
determination of income and deductions, 
capital gains and losses, computation and 
payment of taxes through withholding at 
the source, and through declaration are 
considered. Planning transactions so that 
a minimum amount of tax will result is 
emphasized. Prerequisite: Accounting 10 
or consent of instructor. 



42 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 

ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Inter- 
nal Revenue Code relating to partner- 
ships, estates, trusts, and corporations. 
An extensive series of problems is con- 
sidered, and effective tax planning is em- 
phasized. Prerequisite: Accounting 41. 



43 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING 1 

An intensive study of partnerships, in- 
stallment and consignment sales, branch 
accounting, bankruptcy and reorganiza- 
tion, estates and trusts, government en- 
tities, nonprofit organizations, and ac- 
counting and reporting for the SEC. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 21. One-half 
unit of credit. 



20 



44 CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization. 
General systems theory, financial control 
systems, centralization-decentralization, 
performance measurement and evalua- 
tion, forecasts and budgets, and 
marketing, production and finance 
models for control purposes. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 31 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

45 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and 
the auditor's report written. THIS 
COURSE IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS 
WHO HAVE EITHER COMPLETED 
OR ARE ENROLLED IN ACCOUN- 
TING 40. One-half unit of credit. Grade 
will be recorded as "S" or "U. " 

46 SEMINAR ON APB OPINIONS AND 
FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors 
with library assignments to gain a 
workable understanding of the highly 
technical opinions of the Accounting 
Principles Board and standards of the 
Financial Accounting Standards Board. 
One term paper. Possible trip to New 
York City to attend a public hearing of 
the Financial Accounting Standards 
Board. Prerequisite: Accounting 10. May 
term. 

47 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 
Certain areas of advanced accounting 
theory, including business combinations, 
consolidated financial statements, and ac- 
counting and reporting for the Securities 
and Exchange Commission are covered. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 21. One- ha If 
unit of credit. 

48 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS FOR 
CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice 
sections of past C.P.A. examinations, 
which require a thorough knowledge of 
the core courses in their solution, are 
assigned. The course is intended to meet 
the needs of those interested in public ac- 
counting and preparation for the Cer- 
tified Public Accountants Examination. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 30 or consent of 
instructor. One-half unit of credit. Grade 
will be recorded as "S" or "U. " 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off 
campus under the supervision of a public 
or private accountant. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Typical examples of recent studies in ac- 
counting are: computer program to 
generate financial statements, educational 



core for public accountants, inventory 
control, and church taxation. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Assistant Professor: Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The Accounting-Mathematical 
Sciences interdisciplinary major is 
designed to offer, within a liberal-arts 
framework, courses which will aid in 
constructing mathematical models 
for business decision making. 
Students obtain the necessary 
substantial background in both 
mathematical sciences and accoun- 
ting. 

Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 10, 20, 21, 30, 31, 41, 42. 
In Mathematical Sciences required 
courses are: Computer Science 15 and 
37 and Mathematics 12, 18, 19, 38, 
and 13 or 32. Recommended courses 
include: Mathematics 20, 33; 
Business 23, 34, 35, 36, 38, 39; Com- 
puter Science 26; Economics 10, 11; 
Psychology 15, 24; and Sociology 10. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American Studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students 
to the complexities underlying the 
development of America and its con- 
temporary life. The 13 major courses 
include: 

FOUR CORE COURSES — The 
primary integrating units of the ma- 
jor, these team-taught courses will 
teach you how to think of ideas from 
different points of view and how to 
correlate information and methods 
from various disciplines: 

America As a Civilization (First 
semester of major study) 



American Studies — Research and 
Methodology (Second semester) 

American Tradition in the Arts and 
Literature (Third semester) 

Internship or Independent Study 
(Junior and/or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — 

Six courses in one option and three in 
the other are needed. Six primary 
concentration-option courses in 
American Arts or American Society 
build around the insights gained in 
the core courses. They focus par- 
ticular attention on areas most ger- 
mane to academic and vocational in- 
terests. The three additional courses 
from the other option give further 
breadth to understanding of 
America. Students also will be en- 
couraged to take elective courses 
relating to other cultures. 

American Arts Concentration Option 

American Art — Art 24 

American Art of the 20th Century — Art 32 

19th Century American Literature 

— English 22 

20th Century American Literature 

— English 23 

American Music — Music 18 or 19 
American Theatre — Theatre 51 

American Society Concentration 
Option 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History to 1877 

— History 42 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History since 1877 

— History 43 

The American Constitutional System 

— Political Science 30 

The American Political Tradition 

— Political Science 47 
American Economic Development 

— Economics 51 

Racial and Cultural Minorities 

— Sociology 34 

Students should design their 
American Studies major in consulta- 
tion with the program coordinator or 
a member of the American Studies 
Committee. 

10 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, socio- 
cultural, economic, and political perspec- 
tives on American civilization with special 
attention to the inter-relationships bet- 
ween these various orientations. 



21 



1 1 AMERICAN STUDIES — RESEARCH 
AND METHODOLOGY 

The study and application of various 
research methods, including new trends in 
historical study, quantitative analysis, 
cross-cultural studies, and on-site inspec- 
tion. 

12 AMERICAN TRADITION IN THE 
ARTS AND LITERATURE 

The relationships of the arts and literature 
to the various historical periods of 
American life. 

70-79 or 80-89 INTERNSHIP OR 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See Index) 
An opportunity to relate the learning in 
the core courses and the concentration 
areas to an actual supervised off-campus 
learning situation or independent study 
project. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
HONORS (See Index) 



ART 



Associate Professor: Shipley 

(Chairman) 

Assistant Professors: Bogle, Lesko 

The Art Department offers two 
degree programs: a bachelor of arts 
degree and a bachelor of fine arts in 
sculpture. 

The B.A. degree: 

The student chooses between a two- 
dimensional and a three-dimensional 
studio track, and completes a core art 
history program. 

The two-dimensional track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 and 21), 
Figure Modeling I (Art 16), Two- 
Dimensional Design (Art 15), and 
Painting I and II (Art 20 and 30). 
Printmaking I and II (Art 28 and 38) 
may be substituted for Painting I and 
II (Art 20 and 30). 

The three-dimensional track con- 
sists of Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 and 
21), Figure Modeling I (Art 16), 
Sculpture I and II (Art 25 and 35), 
and either Figure Modeling II (Art 
26) or Sculpture III (Art 45). 

22 



Each major must take Art 22 and 
23 (Survey of Art) and two additional 
courses in art history (Art 
24-31-32-33-34). Studio Research 
(Art 46) in the chosen track is re- 
quired along with participation in a 
senior exhibition. 



The BFA degree in sculpture: 
The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Depart- 
ment, the Lycoming College distribu- 
tion requirements, and one of the 
field specialization apprenticeship 
programs at the Johnson Atelier in 
Princeton, New Jersey. 

The Art Department course of 
study consists of 12 courses in studio 
and art history: Figure Modeling I 
and II (Art 16 and 26), Sculpture I 
and II (Art 25 and 35), Drawing I and 
II (Art 11 and 21), Introduction to 
Photography (Art 27), 2-D Design 
(Art 15), Survey of Art (Art 22 and 
23), and two additional courses in Art 
History (Art 24, 31, 32, 33, 34). 

Twelve additional course units are 
required of the student. The student 
must meet the requirements of the 
distribution program within these 
courses. 

The student must also complete 
one of the field specialization appren- 
ticeships at the Johnson Atelier 
Technical Institute of Sculpture in 
Princeton, New Jersey. This requires 
the student to be at the Johnson 
Atelier for a period of between 16 and 
23 Vi months. The student receives 
eight course units of credit at 
Lycoming College for successfully 
completing the field specialization ap- 
prenticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is 
expected that the work for the ap- 
prenticeship component will be com- 
pleted during the summers and the 
junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree pro- 
gram is on the basis of meeting the 
admission standards of Lycoming 
College, and passing a portfolio 
review and interview by members of 
the Lycoming College Art Depart- 
ment. 



n DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture 
and proportion stressed. Student is made 
familiar with different drawing techni- 
ques and media. Some drawing from 
nature. Offered in alternate semesters 
with Drawing II and III. 

12 COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional 
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed 
on the study of color as an aesthetic agent 
for the artist. The color theories of Johan- 
nes Itten will form the base for this course 
with some study of the theories of Albert 
Munsell, Faber Berren, and Wilhelm 
Ostwald. 

15 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, 
space, color, and composition are taught 
in relationship to the other two- 
dimensional arts. Perceptual theories and 
their relationships to what and why we see 
what we see in art are discussed with each 
problem. 

16 FIGURE MODELING I 
Understanding the figure will be ap- 
proached through learning the basic struc- 
tures and proportions of the figure. The 
course is conceived as a three-dimensional 
drawing class. At least one figure per stu- 
dent will be cast. 

19 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it 
relates to function of vessels and the 
design parameters imposed by the 
characteristics of clay. The techniques of 
ceramics are taught to encourage expres- 
sion rather than to dispense merely a 
technical body of information. 

20 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques 
and materials. Coordination of color, 
value, and design within the painting is 
taught. Some painting from the figure. 
No limitations as to painting media, sub- 
ject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art 15 
or consent of instructor. 

21 DRAWING 11 

Continued study of the human figure. 
Emphasis is placed on realism and figure- 
ground coordination with the use of value 
and design. Prerequisite: Art 11. 

22 SURVEY OF ART: PREHISTORY TO 
THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architecture, 
sculpture, and painting. Emphasis is on 
the interrelation of form and content and 



on the relatedness of the visual arts to 
their cultural environment: Near East, 
Egypt, Greece, Rome, and Medieval 
Europe. 

23 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE TO THE MODERN 
AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, 
sculpture, and painting. Emphasis is on 
the interrelation of form and content and 
on the relatedness of the visual arts to 
their cultural environment: Renaissance 
to modern. 

24 AMERICAN ART OF THE 18TH AND 
19TH CENTURIES 

The development of the arts in America 
from Colonial times through the 19th cen- 
tury; from the unknown folk artist to 
popular artists such as Winslow Homer 
and Thomas Eakins. 

25 SCULPTURE 1 

An introduction to the techniques, 
materials, and ideas of sculpture. Clay, 
plaster, wax, wood, and other materials 
will be used. The course will be concerned 
with ideas about sculpture as expression, 
and with giving material form to ideas. 

26 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and 
understandings learned in Figure Model- 
ing I to produce larger, more complete 
figurative works. There will be a require- 
ment to cast one of the works in plaster. 
Prerequisite: Art 16 and consent of in- 
structor. 

27 INTRODUCTION TO 
PHOTOGRAPHY 

Objectives of the course are to develop 
technical skills in the use of photographic 
equipment (cameras, films, darkroom, 
print maker) and to develop sensitivity in 
the areas of composition, form, light, pic- 
ture quality, etc. Each student must own 
or have access to a 35mm camera. 

28 PRINTMAKING I 

Practice of the techniques of silk-screen, 
wood-block, and linoleum-block printing. 
Prerequisite: Art 11 or 15. 

29 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on 
use of the wheel and technical aspects 
such as glaze making and kiln firing. 
Prerequisite: Art 19. 

30 PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art 
are studied. No limitations as to painting 



media, subject matter, or style. Prere- 
quisite: Art 20. 

31 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Stylistic developments in Europe from 
1880 to the present, including Cubism, 
Fauvism, Expressionism, Dada, and Sur- 
realism. Picasso, Matisse, Kandinsky, 
and Mondrian are among the major ar- 
tists studied. 



32 AMERICAN ART OF THE 20TH 
CENTURY 

Painting, sculpture, and architecture in 
the United States from 1900 to the present 
with emphasis on developments of the 
1950's and 1960's: an inquiry into the 
meaning and historical roots of contem- 
porary art. 



33 19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Emphasis on painting, sculpture, and ar- 
chitecture of Western Europe from 1760 
to 1900, including the work of late 18th- 
century artists David and Goya and 19th- 
century developments from Romanticism 
to Post-impressionism. 

34 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 
Painting, sculpture, and architecture in 
Italy and the Northern countries from the 
late 13th century through the early 16th 
century. Artists include Giotto, 
Donatello, Alberti, Leonardo da Vinci, 
Michelangelo, Van Eyck, Durer, and 
Bruegel. 

35 SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 25). 
Emphasis is on advanced technical pro- 
cesses. Casting of bronze and aluminum 
sculpture will be done in the school foun- 
dry. Prerequisite: Art 25. 

37 PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in 
Photography I by continued growth in 
technical expertise, presentation, concep- 
tual ability, and aesthetic sensibility. Em- 
phasis is placed upon term essay in area of 
student's interest and presented in booklet 
format. Prerequisite: Art 27. 

38 PRINTMAKING II 

Further exploration of silk-screen printing 
techniques, practice of the techniques of 
engraving, drypoint, etching, and aqua- 
tint. 

40 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 



41 DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, in- 
dividual style, and professional control of 
drawing techniques and media are now 
emphasized. 

45 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow 
a conceptual and technical line of 
development. Prerequisites: Art 16, 25. 
and 35. 

46 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of 
the appropriate faculty member, includes 
creation of work which may be incor- 
porated in the senior group exhibition. 
Student works in private studio assigned 
by the department. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local 
businesses, and museum work at the 
Lycoming County Historical Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the 
art noveau, lithography, photography, 
pottery, problems in illustration, and 
watercolor. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Professor: Fineman 
Assistant Professor: Erickson 
(Chairman) 
Instructor: Keig 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifical- 
ly designed to train students in the 
field of planetarium education. The 
major in physics prepares students 
for graduate work in physics or 
astronomy, for the cooperative pro- 
gram in engineering, or for state cer- 
tification as secondary school 
teachers of physics. Juniors and 
seniors in both majors are required to 
attend and participate in the weekly 
departmental colloquia. 

A number of courses in this depart- 
ment are offered on two levels, which 
differ in the degree of mathematical 



23 



rigor and sophistication needed. All 
such courses have dual catalog 
numbers, with the letters B (basic) 
and A (advanced) appearing after the 
course names to indicate the level. 
Both the B and A level of a course 
meet together for the same three 
hours of lecture each week, while the 
A level meets for one additional hour 
each week of more advanced 
mathematical development of the 
material. This system is designated as 
the "3 + 1" method. No student may 
earn credit for both levels of a course. 

The major in astronomy requires 
AsPh 11,12, either 15 or 25, either 16 
or 26, 30, either 34 or 44, either 35 or 
45, and either 36 or 46; Mathematics 
18 and 19 (Calculus I and II), and one 
year of chemistry. One or more of the 
following are recommended: AsPh 3, 
4, 5, 27, and 33, and Art 27 
(Photography I). 

The major in physics requires AsPh 
11, either 12 or 13, 25, 26, 28, 29, and 
at least two courses chosen from 27, 
33, 37, 38, 44, 45, 46, and 48; 
Mathematics 18 and 19 (Calculus I 
and II), and one year of chemistry. 
With departmental consent, advanc- 
ed courses may be substituted for 
AsPh 11, 12, or 13. Students in the 
cooperative engineering program may 
substitute AsPh 27 for 29. In addi- 
tion, Mathematics 20 (Multivariate 
Calculus) and 21 (Differential Equa- 
tions) are required for graduate 
school preparation and the 
cooperative engineering program. It 
is also recommended that students 
planning on graduate study take a 
foreign language and courses in com- 
puter science. 



3 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the oppor- 
tunity to make a variety of astronomical 
observations, both visually and 
photographically, with and without 
telescopes. The planetarium is used to 
familiarize the student with the sky at 
various times during the year and from 
different locations on earth. 

4 FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field 



techniques needed to study the geology of 
an area. May term. 

5 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient 
Greece to the present, emphasizing the 
impact that astronomical discoveries and 
the conquest of space have had on 
Western culture. Four hours of lecture per 
week. 

1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 

1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the 
universe from the solar system to distant 
galaxies. Describes the techniques and in- 
struments used in astronomical research. 
Presents not only what is reasonably well 
known about the universe, but also con- 
siders some of the major unsolved pro- 
blems. Lectures presented by the "3 + I" 
method; also two hours of laboratory per 
week. Fall semester. Corequisite for II: 
Mathematics 17 or consent of instructor. 

2 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

12 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that 
continually affect the planet Earth, shap- 
ing our environment. Describes how past 
events and lifeforms can be reconstructed 
from preserved evidence to reveal the 
history of our planet from its origin to the 
present. Emphasizes the ways in which 
geology, meteorology, and oceanography 
interrelate with man and the environment. 
Lectures presented by the "3 + I" 
method; also two hours of laboratory per 
week. Spring semester. Corequisite for 
12: Mathematics 17 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

13 METEOROLOGY 

The general properties of the atmosphere 
and their measurements will be discussed 
in terms of basic physical and chemical 
laws. Two basic themes will guide the ap- 
proach, i.e., the atmosphere behaves like 
a giant heat engine, and weather patterns 
exist from a micro-to-macro scale. Three 
lectures and one two-hour laboratory per 
week. May term only. Alternate years. 

15-16 PHYSICS WITH LIFE SCIENCE 
APPLICATIONS 
The basic concepts, principles, and laws 
of physics are presented in this non- 
calculus introductory physics course. 
Topics include mechanics, elastic proper- 
ties of matter, fluids, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, 
and radioactivity. Many of the examples 
and problems used to illustrate the physics 
are selected from the life sciences. Three 
hours of lecture, one hour of recitation. 



and one three-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 17 or consent 
of instructor. (Credit may not be earned 
for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 and 26.) 

25-26 INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS WITH 
CALCULUS 
A mathematically rigorous introduction 
to physics designed for majors in physics, 
astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, ther- 
modynamics, electricity and magnetism, 
waves, optics, and modern physics. Five 
hours of lecture and recitation and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Core- 
quisite: Mathematics 18-19 (Calculus I 
and II). (Credit may not be earned for 
both 15 and 25 or for both 16 and 26.) 

27 ELECTRONICS 

D.C. and A.C. circuit and network 
theory, active devices such as transistors, 
operational amplifiers, integrated cir- 
cuits, and introduction to digital elec- 
tronics will be covered. Three lectures and 
two two-hour laboratory sessions per 
week. Prerequisites: Astronomy/ Physics 
16 or 26, and Mathematics 9 or 18 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

28 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single par- 
ticles and systems of particles. Rigid 
bodies. Introduction to the mechanics of 
continuous media. Moving reference 
frames. Lagrangian mechanics. Four 
hours of lecture and three hours of 
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Astronomy and Physics 25 (Concepts of 
Phvsics A) and Mathematics 19 (Calculus 
III 

29 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 
The electromagnetic field, electrical 
potential, magnetic field and electric and 
magnetic properties of matter. Electric 
circuits. Maxwell's equations. Laboratory 
includes electronics as well as classical 
electricity and magnetism. Four hours of 
lecture and three hours of laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Astronomy and 
Physics 26 (Waves and Particles A). 

30 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects 
of planetarium programming, operation 
and maintenance. Students are required 
to prepare and present a planetarium 
show. Upon successfully completing the 
course, students are eligible to become 
planetarium assistants. Two hours of lec- 
ture and demonstration and four hours of 
practical training per week. Prerequisites: 
Astronomy and Physics I or 11 (Prin- 
ciples of Astronomy) or consent of the in- 
structor. 



24 



33 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics and optical systems; 
physical optics, interference, Fraunhofer 
and Fresnel diffraction and coherence and 
lasers will be covered. Three lectures and 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisites: Astronomy/ Physics 16 or 26 and 
Mathematics 9 or 18 or consent of instruc- 
tor. A Iternate years. 

34 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY B 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY A 
A detailed presentation of the special 
theory of relativity, and a short view of 
the general theory and its classical proofs. 
Man's concepts of the universe, with par- 
ticular attention to alternative modern 
cosmological models. Discussion of the 
Cosmological Principle, its rationale, and 
its implications. Lectures will be 
presented by the "3 + I " method. Credit 
may not be earned for both Astronomy 
and Physics 34 and 44. Prerequisites for 
Astronomy and Physics 34: 11 (Principles 
of Astronomy) and either Astronomy and 
Physics 15 or 25 (Concepts of Physics B 
or A), Mathematics 18 (Calculus I). 
Prerequisites for Astronomy and Physics 
44: 11 (Principles of Astronomy) and 25 
(Concepts of Physics A). Alternate years. 

35 STELLAR EVOLUTION AND 
NUCLEOSYNTHESIS B 

45 STELLAR EVOLUTION AND 
NUCLEOSYNTHESIS A 

The physical principles governing the in- 
ternal structure and external appearance 
of stars. Mechanisms of energy genera- 
tion and transport within stars. The 
evolution of stars from initial formation 
to final stages. The creation of chemical 
elements by nucleosynthesis. Lectures 
presented by the "3 + I " method. Credit 
may not be earned for both Astronomy 
and Physics 35 and 45. Prerequisites for 
Astronomy and Physics 35: 11 (Principles 
of Astronomy) and either Astronomy and 
Physics 16 or 26 (Waves and Particles B 
or A). Corequisite for Astronomy and 
Physics 35: Mathematics 19 (Calculus II) 
or consent of instructor. Prerequisites for 
Astronomy and Physics 45: II (Principles 
of Astronomy) and 26 (Waves and Par- 
ticles A). Alternate years. 

36 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE B 

46 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE A 
The notion of objects in gravitational 
fields. Introduction to the n-body pro- 
blem. The relation between stellar 
motions and the galactic potential. The 
large scale structure of galaxies in general 
and of the Milky Way Galaxy in par- 
ticular. Lectures presented by the "3 + 



1" method. Credit may not be earned for 
both Astronomy and Physics 36 and 46. 
Prerequisites for 36: 11 (Principles of 
Astronomy) and either 15 or 25 (Concepts 
of Physics B or A). Corequisite for 
Astronomy and Physics 36: Mathematics 
19 (Calculus II) or consent of instructor. 
Prerequisite for Astronomy and Physics 
46: 11 (Principles of Astronomy) and 25 
(Concepts of Physics A). Corequisite for 
Astronomy and Physics 46: 28 
(Mechanics) or consent of instructor. 
A Iternate years. 

37 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 
Classical thermodynamics will be 
presented showing that the macroscopic 
properties of a system can be specified 
without a knowledge of the microscopic 
properties of the constituents of the 
system. Then, statistical mechanics will be 
developed showing these same macro- 
scopic properties. Four hours of lecture 
and recitation per week. Prerequisites: 
AsPh 16 or 26 and Mathematics 19 
(Calculus It). Alternate years. 

38 ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR 
PHYSICS 

The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the 
earliest evidence of quantization. Struc- 
ture and spectra of atoms and molecules. 
Extension of quantum theory to the solid 
state. Four hours of lecture and recitation 
and one three-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisite: AsPh 16 or 26 and 
Mathematics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate 
years. 

48 INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

Basic concepts and formulation of quan- 
tum theory. The free particle, the simple 
harmonic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, 
and central force problems will be discuss- 
ed. Both time-independent and time- 
dependent perturbation theory will be 
covered. Four hours of lecture and recita- 
tion. Prerequisite: either Astronomy and 
Physics 26 (Waves and Particles A) or 
Chemistry 31 (Physical Chemistry II) and 
Mathematics 21 (Differential Equations). 

49 ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 
COLLOQUIA 

Active scientists in astronomy, physics, 
and related areas are invited to present 
lectures on their own research or other 
professional activities. In addition, 
seniors majoring in astronomy or physics 
present the results of a literature survey or 
individual research project. One hour per 
week. Majors in this department must at- 
tend three semesters without credit during 



junior and senior years (register for non- 
credit 00, Colloquia). Credit may be earn- 
ed during the senior semester in which the 
student's presentation is given. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under 
the supervision of professional physicists 
employed by local industries or hospitals. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy and/or physics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



BIOLOGY 



Associate Professors: Angstadt 
(Chairman), Diehl, Zaccaria 
Assistant Professors: Gabriel, 
D. King, Zimmerman 
A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 10-11, 21, 22, 23, 
24, and 25. Departmental internships 
cannot be used to fulfill the eighth re- 
quired course. In addition, three units 
of chemistry and two units of 
mathematical science are required. 
The chemistry requirement must in- 
clude at least one unit of organic 
chemistry chosen from Chemistry 15, 
20, or 21. The mathematical science 
courses must be chosen from Com- 
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 9, 
13, 17 or above, or their equivalent. 
Certain specific exceptions to the core 
program will be made for three-year 
students enrolled in cooperative pro- 
grams. Such exceptions are noted 
under the particular cooperative pro- 
gram described in the last section of 
the Academic Program chapter of the 
catalog. Students interested in these 
programs should contact the program 
director before finalizing their in- 
dividual programs. Credit may not be 
earned for both Biology 1 and 10 or 
for both Biology 2 and 1 1 . Consent of 
instructor may replace Biology 10-11 
as a prerequisite for all biology 
courses. 



25 



1-2 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, 
including ecological systems, form and 
function in selected representative 
organisms (especially man), cell theory, 
molecular biology, reproduction, in- 
heritance, adaptation, and evolution. The 
course is designed primarily for students 
not planning to major in the biological 
sciences. Three hours of lecture and one 
two-hour laboratory per week. 

3 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 
A methods course for students preparing 
to teach biology. Sources and methods of 
collecting and preserving various plant 
and animal materials. Summer term only. 

5-6 HUMAN ANATOMY — 
PHYSIOLOGY 

An introduction to the physics and 
chemistry relative to biological systems. 
Human anatomy, physiology, and 
developmental biology will be surveyed. 
An introduction to microbiology with em- 
phasis given to host-pathogen relation- 
ships and the immune response. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. 

10- 1 1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology 
designed for students planning to major 
in the biological sciences. Major topics 
considered include the origin of life, 
cellular respiration and photosynthesis, 
genetics, development, anatomy and 
physiology, ecology, behavior, and evolu- 
tion. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. 

21 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology 
of microorganisms as well as to their role 
in disease, their economic importance, 
and industrial applications. Three hours 
of lecture and two-hour laboratory 
periods per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
10-11. 

22 GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treat- 
ment of classical, molecular, cytological, 
physiological, microbial, human, and 
population genetics. Three hours of lec- 
ture and two two-hour laboratory periods 
per week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 0-1 1. 



23 



ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 
The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, en- 
docrine, digestive, cardio-vascular, 
respiratory, renal, nervous, and reproduc- 
tive systems. Mammalian physiology is 



stressed. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-1 1. 

24 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology 
with emphasis on the role of chemical, 
physical, and biological factors affecting 
the distribution and succession of plant 
and animal populations and communities. 
Included will be field studies of local 
habitats as well as laboratory experimen- 
tation. Two hours of lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. 

25 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants 
and related organisms. The study will 
comprise four general topic areas: form, 
including morphology and anatomy of 
plants in growth and reproduction; func- 
tion, concentrating on nutrition and 
metabolism peculiar to photosynthetic 
organisms; classification systems and 
plant identification, and human uses of 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-1 1. 

30 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF 
VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, 
structure, and functions of the principal 
organs of the vertebrates. Special atten- 
tion is given to the progressive modifica- 
tion of organs from lower to higher 
vertebrates. Three hours of lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate 



31 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
structures of the body which are formed 
from them. Focus is on normal human 
histology. Three hours of lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

32 PLANT AND GREENHOUSE 
MANAGEMENT 

A course concerned with the care of 
houseplants and the management of small 
greenhouses. Class time will include lec- 
tures, discussions, demonstrations, 
greenhouse exercises, and field trips to 
local greenhouses. Topics will include the 
theoretical and practical aspects of the 
care and feeding, propagation, light and 
water requirements, and disease control 
for many of the common house and 
greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: Biology 
1-2 or 10-11. Mav term only. 



33 ECONOMIC AND 
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 

Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly 
food and drug plants, having significance 
for human affairs. Three hours of lecture 
and one three-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: Biology 10-11. Biology 25. 
A Iternate years. 

34 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 
Comparative study of the invertebrate 
phyla with emphasis on phylogeny, 
physiology, morphology, and ecology. 
Two three-hour lecture/laboratory 
periods per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
10-11. Alternate years. 

35 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 
Physico-chemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; 
biochemical and cellular bases of growth, 
development and responses of organisms. 
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 10-11 and a year of chemistry. 
Alternate years. 

36 INTRODUCTION TO MARINE 
BIOLOGY AND BIOLOGICAL 
OCEANOGRAPHY 

The study of major marine habitats and 
the adaptations of marine organisms as 
well as the physical and chemical 
characteristics of oceans. This field- 
oriented course is held at a major marine 
biological station, and includes diving and 
collecting from boats. Prerequisite: 
Biology 10-11. May term only. 

37 FIELD ORNITHOLOGY 

A field-oriented course, with in-the-field 
discussions, demonstrations, and exer- 
cises dealing with the systematics and 
identification of the birds of the Northern 
U.S., their behavior, migration, habitat 
selection, and populations dynamics. 
Studies will stress experimental techniques 
used in the field, including banding, 
recording and playback methods, ter- 
ritorial mapping, and population 
analysis. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 
May term only. 

38 CLINICAL MICROBIOLOGY 

A rigorous introduction to clinical 
microbiology with emphasis given to 
rapid identification of human bacterial 
pathogens. Laboratory to include such 
diagnostic procedures as antibiotic sen- 
sitivity testing, serological diagnosis, 
anaerobic culture techniques, and 
hemolytic reactions. Field trips will be 



26 



taken to several clinical labs. Prere- 
quisites: Biology 10-11, Biology 21. May 
term onlv. 



39 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the relation- 
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions 
will focus on topics such as chromosomal 
abnormalities, metabolic variation and 
disease, somatic cell genetics, genetic 
screening, and immunogenetics. 
Laboratory exercises will offer practical 
experiences in genetic diagnostic techni- 
ques. Prerequisite: Biology 1-2 or 10-11. 
Mav term onlv. 



40 PARASITOLOGY AND 

MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 

The biology of parasites and parasitism. 
Studies on the major groups of animal 
parasites and anthropod vectors of 
disease will involve taxonomy and life 
cycles. Emphasis will be made on 
parasites of medical and veterinary im- 
portance. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 



41 VERTEBRATE 
EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed 
fetus. Particular attention is given to the 
chick and human as representative 
organisms. Two three-hour lec- 
ture/laboratory periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 



42 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolu- 
tion, and biological significance of animal 
behaviors in their normal environment 
and social contexts. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one four-hour laboratory each 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-/1. Alter- 
nate vears. 



44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of 
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, pro- 
teins, and nucleic acids; integration of 
metabolism; and biochemical control 
mechanisms, including allosteric control, 
induction, repression, as well as the 
various types of inhibitive control 
mechanisms. Three hours of lecture, one 
three-hour laboratory and one hour of ar- 
ranged work per week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 20-21 or Chemistry 5, or con- 
sent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Chemistry 44. Alternate years. 



46 PLANT ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 

A study of plant physiology as a function 
of plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships 
and environmental factors will be examin- 
ed from a background of the structure 
and development of cells, tissues, organs, 
and whole plants. Three hours of lecture 
and one three-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: Biology 10-11, Biology 25. 
A Iternate years. 

47 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concern- 
ing how pathogens cause disease and host 
defense mechanisms against infectious 
diseases. Characterization of and rela- 
tionships between antigens, haptens, and 
antibodies are presented. Serological 
assays will include: agglutination 
precipitations, immunofluorescence, Im- 
munoelectrophoresis, and complement 
fixation. Other topics are: immediate and 
delayed hypersensitivities (i.e. allergies 
such as hay fever and poison ivy), im- 
munological renal diseases, im- 
munohematology (blood groups, etc.), 
the chemistry and function of comple- 
ment autoimmunity, and organ graft re- 
jection phenomena. Three hours of lec- 
ture, one three-hour laboratory, and one 
hour of arranged work per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

48 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the 
role of the endocrine hormones in the in- 
tegration of body functions. This is 
followed by a study of the control of hor- 
mone synthesis and release, and a con- 
sideration of the mechanisms by which 
hormones accomplish their effects on 
target organs. Two three-hour lec- 
ture/laboratory periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Recent samples of internships in the 
department include ones with the Depart- 
ment of Environmental Resources, 
nuclear medicine or rehabilitative 
therapies at the local hospital. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Departmental studies are experimentally 
oriented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have 
involved stream analysis, gypsy moth 
research, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 



Professor: Hollenback 
Assistant Professor: E. 
Weaver (Chairman) 
Instructor: Gordon 
Lecturer: Larrabee 



King, 



In order to graduate with a major 
in business administration, a student 
must complete one of the following 
two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train 
students in the functions of today's 
profit and nonprofit organizations. 
The program provides a well- 
balanced preparation for a wide 
variety of careers, including general 
administration, personnel ad- 
ministration, commercial banking, 
investments and portfolio manage- 
ment, security analysis, corporate 
financial management, general 
marketing, sales, product manage- 
ment, advertising, retail merchandis- 
ing, and production and manufactur- 
ing management. 

Required courses are Business 
10-11, 23, 28-29, 38-39, 40, and 41, 
and Mathematics 13. Business 32, 43, 
or 44 may be substituted for Business 
29, and Business 33 may be 
substituted for Business 39. Accoun- 
ting 10 may be substituted for 
Business 10 if the student is transferr- 
ing into the Business Administration 
major, but duplicate credit will not be 
granted. 

Majors are also urged to enroll in 
Economics 10 and 11, Business 35 
and 36, Mathematics 12, and Com- 
puter Science 15. Majors also are en- 
couraged to take a foreign language. 
The additional elective offerings are 
intended to add depth in the areas of 
finance, marketing, and manage- 
ment. 

Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train 
students in the quantitative aspects of 
business administration. It provides 
excellent undergraduate preparation 



27 



for graduate study in management 
science, operations research, and 
quantitative business administration. 
The program also provides a solid 
preparation for careers in production 
control, systems analysis, research, 
forecasting, industrial and technical 
sales as well as any of the functional 
areas of business where quantitative 
training would be an added qualifica- 
tion. 

Required courses are Business 
10-11, 23, 38-39, 46; Economics 10, 
11, 41; Mathematics 18-19, 12, 13, 
38, and Computer Science 15. Ac- 
counting 10 may be substituted for 
Business 10 if the student is transferr- 
ing into the business administration 
major. 

In addition, the following are 
strongly recommended: Business 41, 
and Mathematics 14 and 37. Also, 
depending upon the interest of the 
students, the following combinations 
of courses are recommended: either 
Mathematics 31 and Computer 
Science 26, or Business 28 and 
Business 40, or Business 33 and 
Economics 30 and 31. 

10-11 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

The business firm is a decision-making in- 
stitution adapting to a constantly chang- 
ing environment. Future administrators 
and managers are introduced to their 
stewardship responsibilities by use of ac- 
counting and statistical techniques as 
tools in planning and controlling the 
organization. 

23 QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS 
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful 
in making business decisions. Topics in- 
clude: decision theory, inventory models, 
network models, queuing, forecasting, 
and utility. Prerequisite: Mathematics 13 
or consent of instructor. 

28-29 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of 
the distribution activities of the firm, and 
an analysis and evaluation of the 
marketing system, its institutions, and 
processes. Application of marketing prin- 
ciples and the development of strategies 
for specific marketing problems. 
Product, channel flow, promotion, and 
pricing strategies explored. Readings, 
cases, and games. 

28 



32 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of 
promotion. Techniques of analysis and 
control in the use of advertising and 
publicity as tools in developing business 
strategy. 

33 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of 
the economy and the structure and func- 
tions of financial markets and the agen- 
cies involved; brokerage houses and stock 
exchanges; the various types of in- 
vestments available. Techniques used to 
evaluate financial securities. Also covered 
are recent developments in investment 
theory. 

34 INSURANCE 

Analysis of the major insurance methods 
of overcoming risk, including life, acci- 
dent, health, marine, and social in- 
surance. Fidelity and surety bonds. Com- 
mercial and government plans. 

35 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the 
nature, sources, and fundamentals of the 
law in general, and particularly as relating 
to contracts, agency, and negotiable in- 
struments. Open only to juniors and 
seniors. 

36 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history 
of the law relating to legal association, 
real property, wills, and estates. Open on- 
ly to juniors and seniors. 

38-39 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 

Financial planning, analysis, and control 
in corporations. Development and ap- 
plication of financial principles. Financial 
market, profit planning, ratio analysis, 
working capital management, interest 
rates and capital budgeting, financial and 
operating leverage, cost of capital, valua- 
tion, dividend policy, long-and short-term 
financing, leases, mergers, and acquisi- 
tions. Prerequisite: Business II or Ac- 
counting 20, and Business 23. 

40 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional 
relationships of a business organization as 
well as the problems encountered in coor- 
dinating the internal resources of a firm. 
Emphasis on administrative efficiency 
and procedures. 

41 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of 
business operations; setting of goals; 
coordination of resources, development 
of policies. Analysis of strategic decisions 
encompassing all areas of a business, and 



the use and analysis of control measures. 
Emphasis on both the internal relation- 
ship of various elements of production, 
finance, marketing, and personnel, and 
the relationship of the business entity to 
external stimuli. Readings, cases, and 
games. Prerequisites: Business 23, 28-29, 
28-39, and 40, or consent of instructor. 
Seniors only. 

42 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial 
problems of recruiting, selecting, train- 
ing, and retraining the human resources 
of the firm. Emphasis is placed on the in- 
terrelationship of personnel policies with 
management objectives and philosophies 
in such areas as fringe benefits, wage and 
salary policies, union activities, and 
health and safety. 

43 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 
Planning, organization, and control of 
the retailing firm. Competitive strategy 
development through store location, 
layout, administration organization, buy- 
ing, and pricing. Cases, reading, and 
papers. Alternate years. 

44 RETAIL MANAGEMENT II 

Inventory control, retail sales, promo- 
tion, and financial analysis of the enter- 
prise. Survey of current issues and 
government, social and economic forces 
of concern to the retailer. Retailing prin- 
ciples applied to specific management 
situations through cases, games, and 
reading. Prerequisite: Business 43 or con- 
sent of instructor. A Iternate years. 

45 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and prac- 
tices of Marketing Research. The focus is 
on the development and application of 
Marketing Research Studies. Topics 
covered include selection of a research 
design, project planning and scheduling, 
data specification and gathering, quan- 
titative methods to analyze data, inter- 
pretation of data, and research report 
writing. Readings, cases, and research 
project. Prerequisite: Mathematics 13, 
Business 28, or consent of instructor. 

46 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiz- 
ing, and controlling of operations in a 
productive facility. The course also incor- 
porates quantitative techniques used in 
production- and operations-management 
applications. Topics include: capacity and 
layout planning, facility locations, job 
design and work measurement, produc- 
tion planning and scheduling, inventory 
and quality control. 



47 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy, 
and effective presentation of adver- 
tisements for print media, radio, and 
direct mail. Primarily an exploration of 
creativity through analysis of works of ar- 
tists and writers with application to prac- 
tical advertising, and tailored to the in- 
terests of individual students. May term. 

48 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The 
art of creative selling; application of 
theories from the behavioral sciences to 
selling through the analysis of sales situa- 
tions and techniques. Alternate years. 

49 MANAGING THE SMALL BUSINESS 
How the potential businessman proceeds 
in establishing, operating, and profiting 
from a small business operation. Con- 
sidered and analyzed are such aspects as 
marketing, managing, financing, pro- 
moting, insuring, establishing, develop- 
ing, and staffing the small retail, 
wholesale service, and manufacturing 
firm. May term. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis 
for a paper products firm, planning a 
branch store, hotel and real estate 
management, banking and insurance. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the 
economic impact of a college on a com- 
munity; a marketing strategy for a local 
firm entering the consumer market. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
A recent project was a study of the evolu- 
tion of anti-trust legislation in the United 
States. 



CHEMISTRY 

Professors: Hummer, Radspinner 

Associate Professor: Franz 

(Chairman) 

Part-time Instructor: Baggett 

A major in chemistry consists of 
Chemistry 10-11, 20-21 , 30-3 1 , 32 and 
33; Astronomy/Physics 25-26; 
Mathematics 18, 19 and one of the 
following courses: Mathematics 13, 
20, 21, 32, or Computer Science 15. 
Mathematics 20 and 21 and French or 
German are strongly recommended 



for students planning on graduate 
study in chemistry. To be certified in 
secondary education, chemistry ma- 
jors must also pass two biology 
courses numbered 10 or higher. 

8 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of in- 
organic chemistry. Topics include atomic 
and molecular structure, nomenclature, 
gases, solution, acids and bases, kinetics, 
equilibrium, oxidation-reduction, and 
stoichiometry. The approach is primarily 
descriptive, with illustrations drawn most- 
ly from the health sciences. Along with 
Chemistry 15, this course is designed for 
those students who require only two 
semesters of chemistry, and is not intend- 
ed for students planning to enroll in 
Chemistry courses numbered 20 or above. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: high school 
algebra or Math 5. Not open for credit lo 
students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 10. 

10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the con- 
cepts and models of chemistry. Topics in- 
clude stoichiometry, atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, bon- 
ding, thermochemistry, gases, solutions, 
and chemical reactions. The laboratory 
introduces the student to methods of 
separation, purification and identification 
of compounds according to their physical 
properties. This course is designed for 
students who plan to major in one of the 
sciences. Three hours lecture, one hour 
discussion and one three- hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: placement 
in Chemistry 10 is determined in part by a 
student's score on the mathematics place- 
men! examination. Not open for credit to 
students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 8, except by permission of the 
Chemistry Department. 

1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 10, with em- 
phasis placed on the foundations of 
analytical, inorganic and physical 
chemistry. Topics include kinetics, 
general and ionic equilibria, acid-base 
theory, electrochemistry, ther- 
modynamics, nuclear chemistry, coor- 
dination chemistry, and descriptive in- 
organic chemistry of selected elements. 
The laboratory treats aspects of quan- 
titative and qualitative inorganic analysis. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 10, or 
consent of the Chemistry Department. 



15 BRIEF ORGANIC 
CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon. This course will illustrate the 
principles of organic chemistry with 
material relevant to students in medical 
technology, biology, nursing, forestry, 
education and the humanities. Topics in- 
clude nomenclature, alkanes, arenes, 
functional derivatives, amino acids and 
proteins, carbohydrates and other 
naturally occurring compounds. This 
course is designed for students who re- 
quire only one semester of organic 
chemistry. Three hours lecture, one hour 
discussion, and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 8 or 10. Not open for credit to 
students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 20. 

20-21 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of 
carbon, including both aliphatic and 
aromatic series. The laboratory work in- 
troduces the student to simple fundamen- 
tal methods of organic synthesis, isola- 
tion, and analysis. Three hours lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 11. 

26 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical 
and instrumental methods of quantitative 
analysis with an orientation toward 
clinical applicatons in medical 
technology. Topics include: general 
methods and calculations; solutions; titra- 
tions; photometric analyses (colorimetric, 
atomic absorption, flame emission); elec- 
trochemical methods (ion-selective elec- 
trodes, coulometry), automation. Lec- 
ture, recitation, and laboratory daily. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 10-11 or consent 
of instructor. May not be taken for credit 
following Chemistry 32. May term only. 

30-31 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applica- 
tions. The laboratory work includes 
techniques in physiochemical 
measurements. Three hours lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 11, 
Mathematics 19, and one year of physics 
or-consent of instructor. 

32 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of 
gravimetric, volumetric, and elementary 
instrumental analysis together with prac- 
tice in laboratory techniques and calcula- 
tions of these methods. Two hours lecture 
and two three-hour laboratory periods 
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1 1 or 
consent of instructor. 



29 



33 ADVANCED INORGANIC 
CHEMISTRY 

A study of modern theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship 
to the chemistry of selected elements and 
their compounds. Three hours lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 30, 
Mathematics 19, and one year of physics 
or consent of instructor. 

39 INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic con- 
cepts, and formulation of quantum 
mechanics with emphasis on its physical 
meaning, the free particle, simple har- 
monic oscillator, and central-force 
problems will be investigated. Both time- 
independent and time-dependent pertur- 
bation theory will be covered. The elegant 
operator formalism of quantum 
mechanics will conclude the course. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prere- 
quisites: Mathematics 21, either 
Chemistry 31 or Astronomy and Physics 
26, and consent of instructor. Cross-listed 
as Astronomy and Physics 48. 

40 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
Selected topics, which may include 
mechanisms of organic reactions, syn- 
thesis, detailed structure and chemistry of 
natural products, polynuclear hydrocar- 
bons, and aromatic heterocyclics. Three 
hours lecture. Prerequisite: Chemist r\ 2 1 

41 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS 
Theory and application of the systematic 
identification of pure organic compounds 
and mixtures. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 21. 

43 ADVANCED ANALYTICAL 
CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods 
with emphasis on chromatographic, elec- 
trochemical, and spectroscopic methods 
of instrumental analysis. Three hours lec- 
ture and one four-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 31 
and 32 or consent of instructor. 

44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of 
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, pro- 
teins, and nucleic acids; integration of 
metabolism; and biochemical control 
mechanisms, including allosteric control, 
induction, repression, as well as the 
various types of inhibitive control 
mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 21 
or 15 or consent of instructor. Cross- 
listed as Biology 44. 



45 SPECTROSCOPY AND MOLECULAR 
STRUCTURE 

Theory and practice of molecular struc- 
ture determination by spectroscopic 
methods. Three hours lecture. Pre- or co- 
requisites: Chemistry 31, 33, or consent of 
instructor. 

48 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own research activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical 
literature. Prerequisite: Three semesters 
of non-credit Chemistry Colloquium 
taken during the junior and senior years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

The student will ordinarily work under 
supervision in an industrial laboratory 
and submit a written report on his pro- 
ject. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a 
laboratory research project and will write 
a thesis on his work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
The student will ordinarily work on 
laboratory research project with emphasis 
being on the student's showing initiative 
and making a scholarly contribution. A 
thesis will be written. 



CRIMINAL JUSTICE 



Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint 
students with the American criminal- 
justice system and to provide an 
understanding of the social 
psychological, philosophical, and 
political contexts within which the 
system of criminal justice functions. 
Its aim is to develop students' in- 
tellectual and scientific skills in rais- 
ing and attempting to answer impor- 
tant questions about the system of 
justice and its place in society. The 
program offers opportunity for in- 



tern experience in the field, and 
prepares for careers in the areas of 
law enforcement, probation and 
parole, prisons, and treatment ser- 
vices. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforce- 
ment. Track II prepares for careers in 
corrections. 



Track I - Law Enforcement. The 

major consists of 10 courses, 
distributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice [three courses] 
Introduction to the Criminal 
Justice System [Sociology and 
Anthropology 15] 
Introduction to Law Enforce- 
ment [Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 23] 

The American Prison System 
[Sociology and Anthropology 39] 

B. Courses in the social, 
psychological, philosophical, and 
political context of the justice 
system [seven courses] 
Criminology [Sociology and An- 
thropology 30] and either 
Juvenile Delinquency (Sociology 
and Anthropology 21) or Racial 
and Cultural Minorities (Soci- 
ology and Anthropology 34) (two 
courses) 

Abnormal Psychology (Psychol- 
ogy 16) (one course) 
America as a Civilization 
(American Studies 10). Afro- 
American History (History 28) or 
United States Social and Intellec- 
tual History Since 1877 (History 
43) (one course) 

Law and Society (Political 
Science 35) and Civil Rights and 
Liberties (Political Science 31) 
(two courses) 

Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 18) (one 
course) 

C. Internship or practicum in law 
enforcement. (Recommended but 
not required for the major) 



30 



Track II - Corrections. The major 
consists of 10 courses, distributed as 
follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal 
Justice System (Sociology and 
Anthropology 15) 

The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 39) 
Introduction to Social Work 
(Sociology and Anthropology 42) 

B. Courses in the social, 
psychological, philosophical, and 
political context of the justice 
system (seven courses) 
Criminology (Sociology and An- 
thropology 30) and either 
Juvenile Delinquency (Sociology 
and Anthropology 21) or Racial 
and Cultural Minorities (Soci- 
ology and Anthropology 34 (two 
courses) 

Abnormal Psychology (Psychol- 
ogy 16) (one course) 
America as a Civilization 
(American Studies 10. Afro- 
American History (History 28) or 
United States Social and Intellec- 
tual History Since 1877 (History 
43) (one course) 

Law and Society (Political 
Science 35) and Civil Rights and 
Liberties (Political Science 31) 
(two courses) 

Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 18) (one 
course) 

C. Internship or practicum in cor- 
rections. (Recommended but not 
required for the major. Prere- 
quisites: Mathematics 13, 
Psychology 31, and Psychology 
39. These prerequisites may be 
waived in certain cases by the 
coordination committee. 

Majors should seek advice concern- 
ing course selection from members of 
the coordinating committee and 
should note course prerequisites in 
planning their programs. 



ECONOMICS 



Professors: Opdahl, 
Rabold (Chairman) 

The major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose 
primary interest lies in business 
management; Track II is designed for 
students with an interest in graduate 
work, teaching, government or non- 
business careers, and for those with 
less well-defined interests. 

Track I - Managerial Economics re- 
quires: Economics 10, 11, 32, and 41; 
Business 10-11 or Accounting 10 and 
20; Business 38 and 39, plus two elec- 
tives from Economics 20, 31, 35, 37, 
43, and Business 40. Business 33, In- 
vestments, may be substituted for 
Business 39, Financial Management 
II. 

Track II — Political Economy re- 
quires: Economics 10, 11, 30, 31, 40, 
and five electives of which three must 
be in economics and two in political 
science, all selected with the advice 
and consent of the student's adviser 
or department chairman. Economics 
41, Managerial Economics, may be 
substituted for Economics 30, In- 
termediate Microeconomics. 

In addition, the following courses 
are recommended: all majors — 
Math 13 and Business 23; majors 
planning graduate work — Math 
12-18; Track II majors — Business 
10-11. 

2 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" 
economics, designed to teach students 
how they and their families can be in- 
telligent consumers: that is, how they can 
spend, save, and borrow so as to max- 
imize the value they receive for the income 
they have. Treats subjects such as in- 
telligent shopping; the uses and abuses of 
credit; investing savings; buying in- 
surance, automobiles, and houses; 
medical care costs; estates and wills, etc. 
A Iternale years. 

10 PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL 
ECONOMY I 

Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What in- 



fluences the level of national income and 
employment? What is inflation and why 
do we have it? What is the role of govern- 
ment in a modern capitalistic system? 
How does business organize to produce 
the goods and services we demand? How 
are the American financial and banking 
system organized? What is the nature of 
American unionism? What are the 
elements of government finance and fiscal 
policy? 

1 1 PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL 
ECONOMY II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. 
It deals with the relatively small units of 
the economy such as the firm and the 
family. Analyzes demand and supply. 
Discusses how business firms decide what 
and how much to produce and how goods 
and services are priced in different types 
of markets. Also considers such problems 
as economic growth, international trade, 
poverty, discrimination, ecology, and 
alternative economic systems. 

20 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and 
monetary and fiscal policy; the financial 
organization of society; the banking 
system; credit institutions; capital 
markets, and international financial rela- 
tions. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and II. 
A Iternale years. 

22 ECONOMIC SYSTEMS OF THE WEST 
(CAPITALISM AND SOCIALISM) 

A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic 
systems extrant in the West. Alternate 
years. 

23 SOVIET-TYPE ECONOMICS 

An analysis of the ideologies, institutions, 
and performance of Soviet-type 
economies, with emphasis upon Marxian 
theory and the economy of the U.S.S.R.; 
comparison of selected Eastern European 
and Chinese approaches to communism. 
A Iternale years. 

24 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and 
economic problems associated with ur- 
banization, including poverty, employ- 
ment, education, crime, health, housing, 
land use and the environment, transporta- 
tion, and public finance. Analysis of solu- 
tions offered. Alternate years. 

25 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between en- 
vironmental decay and economic growth, 



31 



with particular reference to failures of the 
price and property-rights systems; ap- 
plication of cost/benefit analysis, 
measures aimed at the creation of an 
ecologically viable economy. Alternate 
years. 

30 INTERMEDIATE 
MICROECONOMICS 

An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory regarding consumer demand, pro- 
duction costs and theory, profit max- 
imization, market structures, and the 
determinants of returns to the factors of 
production. Prerequisite: Economies 10 
and II. 

31 INTERMEDIATE 
MACROECONOMICS 

An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory and practice with regard to 
business fluctuations, national income ac- 
counting, the determination of income 
and employment levels, and the use of 
monetary and fiscal policy. Prerequisite: 
Economics 10 and II. 

32 GOVERNMENT AND THE 
ECONOMY 

An analytical survey of government's ef- 
forts to maintain competition through an- 
titrust legislation; to supervise acceptable 
cases of private monopoly through 
public-utility regulation and via means of 
regulatory commissions, and to en- 
courage or restrain various types of 
private economic activities. Alternate 
years. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 1 1 
or consent of instructor. 

35 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the 
United States, including the structure of 
unions, employers' opposition to unions, 
the role of government in labor- 
management relations, the economic im- 
pact of unions. Alternate years. 

37 PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expen- 
ditures, taxation, and debt at all levels of 
American government. Includes also the 
use of fiscal policy as an economic control 
device. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 1 1 
or consent of instructor. 



4(1 



HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 
A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas 
embodied in the works of Smith, Marx, 
Schumpeter, Keynes, and others. Prere- 
quisite: Economics 10 and 1 1 or consent 
of instructor. 



41 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing 
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory, 
production theory, cost theory, linear 
programming, capital budgeting, market 
structures, and the theory of pricing. 
Prerequisite: Economics 10 and II. 

43 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, 
development, and policies concerning in- 
ternational economic relations, with par- 
ticular reference to the United States. 
Subjects covered include: U.S. commer- 
cial policy and its development, interna- 
tional trade theory, tariffs and other pro- 
tectionist devices, international monetary 
system and its problems, balance of 
payments issues. Alternate years. Prere- 
quisite: Economics 10 and II. 

45 DEVELOPMENT OF 

UNDERDEVELOPED NATIONS 
A study of the theories and problems of 
capital accumulation, allocation of 
resources, technological development, 
growth, planning techniques, and institu- 
tions and international relations en- 
countered by the developing nations. 
Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typically off campus in business, bank- 
ing, or government, supervised by assign- 
ed employee of sponsoring organization. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in 
preparation for graduate school. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 



EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Keesbury 

(Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Conrad 

Lycoming believes that the liberal arts 
provide the best preparation for 
future teachers, thus all education 
students complete a liberal-arts major 
in addition to the certification re- 



quirements. Students can be certified 
in elementary education or one or 
more of the following secondary 
areas: biology, chemistry, English, 
French, general science (with biology 
or astronomy/physics tracks), Ger- 
man, mathematics, physics, social 
studies, and Spanish. All teacher- 
education programs are approved by 
the Pennsylvania Department of 
Education, and Pennsylvania cer- 
fificates are recognized in most other 
states whether through reciprocal 
agreements or by transcript evalua- 
tion. 

Education 20 and Psychology 38 
are prerequisites to all other offerings 
in the Department of Education. 
Education 20 should be taken at least 
two semesters before the professional 
semester. 

Students seeking elementary cer- 
tification must complete Mathematics 
7, Education 40, 41, 42, and 43 as 
prerequisites to the professional 
semester (Education 45, 47, and 48). 
Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should consult 
with a member of the department no 
later than the first semester of the 
sophomore year. Application for the 
professional semester must be made 
before October 1 of the junior year. 
The Department of Education will 
admit to the professional semester 
those applicants who have a 
minimum cumulative grade point 
average of 2.00, are in good academic 
standing, have satisfactorily com- 
pleted the junior year participation 
requirements (secondary students on- 
ly), have paid the student teaching 
fee, and have received a positive 
recommendation. The recommenda- 
tion will be based upon: (a) recom- 
mendations from each student's ma- 
jor department; (b) recommendations 
from two additional faculty outside 
the Department of Education; (c) a 
screening interview conducted by the 
department, and (d) a writing sample 
from each student applicant. Major 
departments have different criteria 
for their recommendations. 
Therefore, students should consult 



32 



with the chairman of their major 
department about those requirements 
as soon as they begin to study for cer- 
tification. 



20 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
STUDY OF EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, 
political, and religious conditions which 
influence American schools and teachers. 
Consideration is given to the school en- 
vironment, the curriculum, and the 
children with the intention that the 
students will examine more rationally 
their "own motives for entering the profes- 
sion. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing 
or consent of the instructor. 



32 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA 
AND COMMUNICATIONS 
A study of the value, design, construc- 
tion, and application of the visual and 
auditory aids to learning. Practical ex- 
perience in the handling of audio-visual 
equipment and materials is provided. Ap- 
plication of audio-visual techniques. Ap- 
plication of the visual and auditory aids to 
learning. Students will plan and carry out 
actual teaching assignments utilizing 
various A-V devices. 



39 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula 
of the public schools and their relation- 
ships to current practices. Special atten- 
tion will be given to the meaning and 
nature of the curriculum, the desirable 
outcomes of the curriculum, conflicting 
and variant conceptions of curricular con- 
tent, modern techniques of curricular 
construction, criteria for the evaluation of 
curricula, the curriculum as a teaching in- 
strument. Emphasis will be placed upon 
the curriculum work within the teaching 
field of each individual. 



40 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS AND 
CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
A course designed to consider the prin- 
cipal means of communication, oral and 
written, including both practical and 
creative uses. Attention will be given to 
listening, speaking, written expression, 
linguistics and grammer, spelling, and 
handwriting. Stress will be placed upon 
the interrelatedness of the language arts. 
Children's literature will be explored as a 
vehicle for developing creative 
characteristics in children and for ensur- 



ing an appreciation of the creative writing 
of others. Observation and participation 
in Greater Williamsport elementary 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 20 and 
Psychology 38 or consent of the instruc- 
tor. 

41 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES 
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, 
and processes of anthropology, 
economics, geography, history, political 
science, and sociology as they relate to the 
elementary school social-science cur- 
riculum. Practical applications, 
demonstrations of methods, and the 
development of integrated teaching units 
using tests, reference books, films, and 
other teaching materials. Observation and 
participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary shcools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of 
the instructor. 

42 TEACHING SCIENCE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Science methods and materials inter- 
preting children's science experiences and 
guiding the development of their scientific 
concepts. A study of the science content 
of the curriculum, its material, and use. 
Observation and participation in Greater 
Williamsport elementary schools. Prere- 
quisites: Education 20 and Psychology 38 
or consent of the instructor. 

43 TEACHING READING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and ra- 
tionale for the implementation of an 
elementary developmental-reading pro- 
gram from kindergarten through sixth 
grade. Emphasis is upon designing a 
reading instructional program which 
reflects the nature of the learning process 
and recognizes principles of child 
development through examination of the 
principles, problems, methods, and 
materials used in elementary reading pro- 
grams. Observation and participation in 
Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Prerequisites: Psychology 38, Education 
20, 40, 41, and 42, or consent of the in- 
structor. 

45 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
The course emphasizes the relationship 
between the theoretical studies of 
physical, social, and cognitive develop- 
ment and the elementary classroom en- 
vironment. Particular consideration will 
be given to the appropriate age and 
developmental level of the students with 



an emphasis upon selection and utiliza- 
tion of methods in all the elementary sub- 
ject areas, including art and music. 
Specific attention will be given to the 
development of strategies for structuring 
lesson plans, for maintaining classroom 
control, and for overall classroom 
management. Direct application will be 
made to the individual student-teaching 
experience. Prerequisites: Math 7, Educa- 
tion 40, 41, 42, and 43, or consent of the 
instructor. 



46 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

A study of materials, methods, and 
techniques of teaching with emphasis on 
the student's major. Stress is placed on 
the selection and utilization of visual and 
auditory aids to learning. Students will 
teach demonstration lessons in the 
presence of the instructor and the 
members of the class and will observe 
superior teachers in Greater Williamsport 
secondary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 20, Psychology 38, and the participa- 
tion experience. 

47 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and 
challenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

48 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated 
minimum requirements. Professional 
laboratory experience under the supervi- 
sion of a selected cooperating teacher in a 
public elementary school in Greater 
Williamsport. Organizes learning ex- 
periences. Actual classroom experience.* 

49 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated 
minimum requirements. Professional 
laboratory experience under the supervi- 
sion of a selected cooperating teacher in a 
public secondary school in Greater 
Williamsport. Organized learning ex- 
perience. Emphasis on actual classroom 
experience, responsibility in the guidance 
program, and out-of-class activities.* 

•Student teachers are required to follow 
the calendar of the school district to 
which they are assigned. 



33 



ENGLISH 



Professor: Van Marter 

Associate Professors: Ford, Jensen 

(Chairman), Madden, Rife 
Assistant Professors: Moses, F. Wild 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 1 or English 2. 
These nine courses must include 
English 17, 20, 21, 22, 23; and one 
from English 35 and 36. 

The remaining electives may in- 
clude any course from English 12 and 
above not already taken to satisfy the 
preceding requirements. With the 
consent of the Department of 
English, an appropriate course from 
the offerings of other departments 
may be substituted for an English 
elective. 

Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take 
English 35 and English 38. 

The Department of English par- 
ticipates with seven others in the 
American Studies interdisciplinary 
major, in which American literature 
courses constitute an important part 
of the American-arts concentration 
area. 

Because of its emphasis on com- 
munication skills, a major or a minor 
in English is excellent preparation for 
a wide range of professions. In addi- 
tion to preparing students for 
graduate work or for teaching, a ma- 
jor or a minor in English can be 
valuable for those interested in a 
career in law, ministry, publishing, 
editing or writing, and business, to 
name a few. 

I WORKSHOP IN DEVELOPMENTAL 
WRITING 

Classroom and laboratory instruction in 
organizing and writing the detailed 
paragraph and illustrative expository 
theme, with major emphasis on spelling, 
grammar, and sentence structure. Writing 
assignments and classroom exercises 
designed to ensure mastery of the 
student's special problems in basic 
writing. 

One-half unit grade of "S" will be 
assigned when the student has successfully 
completed all of the work in the course. 
Required of, and limited to, those who 
have not been exempted from English 1. 



2 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in either report and 
evaluative writing or in analytical and 
argumentative writing. This may be ac- 
complished by taking one of the following 
options: 

Writing for the Sciences and Business: 
Extensive practice in report and 
evaluative writing, with particular 
reference to business and technology as 
human concerns. 

Writing for the Liberal Arts: Extensive 
practive in analytic and argumentative 
writing with particular reference to the 
humanities and social sciences. 

NOTE: Although either of these op- 
tions will satisfy the composition require- 
ment, Writing for the Sciences and 
Business would be more suitable for the 
student interested in business, in the 
natural and physical sciences, and in 
related professions; whereas Writing for 
the Liberal Arts would be more suitable 
for the student interested in humanities, 
in law, and in the social sciences. 

12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature 
designed for the general student and 
utilizing one of the following approaches: 
major literary genres, selected literary 
masterpieces, or traditional themes in 
literature. 

16 WRITING FOR SPECIAL 
AUDIENCES 

Intensive practice in writing and presen- 
ting information to various audiences 
within the student's own discipline. In- 
cludes training in the use of graphics and 
in basic library research methods. Prere- 
quisite: A grade of Cor better in English 2 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

17 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students 
of literature with the critical skills 
necessary for an understanding of poetry, 
fiction, drama, and film. Intensive 
reading and extensive practice in writing 
the critical essay. Required of English ma- 
jors. 

18 NEWSWRITING FOR THE 
PRINT MEDIA 

Analysis of and practice in the basic 
forms of newswriting: the elements of 
news, lead, style, and structure. Frequent 
workshop sessions for detailed critiques 
and discussion of student writing. Alter- 
nate years. 

19 NEWSWRITING FOR THE 
BROADCAST MEDIA 

Analysis of and practice in newswriting 
for broadcast: the news story, the 



newscast, and the interview. Frequent 
workshop sessions for critiques of student 
writing and oral presentations. Alternate 
years. 

20 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from 
the Anglo-Saxon through the Neo- 
classical periods. Such writers as 
Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, 
Swift, Pope, and Johnson; representative 
works from Beowulf to Sterne's Sen- 
timental Journey. 

21 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present. Par- 
ticular emphasis on such writers as Blake, 
Wordsworth, Shelley, Keats, Tennyson, 
Browning, Arnold, Hardy, Yeats, Eliot. 

22 AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1800, followed by more 
intensive study of the literature and 
thought of the period 1800-1900. Major 
focus on the works of Emerson, Thoreau, 
Poe, Hawthorne, Melville, Whitman, 
Dickinson, and Howells. 

23 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tenden- 
cies in American literature during the pre- 
sent century. Such forces as naturalism, 
realism, and modernism; such writers as 
James, Dreiser, Hemingway, Faulkner, 
Frost, Eliot, and Stevens. 

24 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short 
story. Consideration of representative ex- 
amples of the form with emphasis on 
American and European writers of the 
19th and 20th centuries. 

25 DEVELOPMENT OF THE NOVEL 

Historical study of the development of the 
novel from the 18th through the 20th cen- 
turies. Novels analyzed both as works of 
prose art and as turning points in the 
development of the novel. Alternate 
years. 

26 LITERATURE AND FILM 

The relationship between the conventions 
of literature and film with emphasis on 
examination of representative literary and 
film works. Media comparison to reveal 
the problems of adaptation. 

28 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
FICTION AND POETRY 
A beginning course in the theory and 
practice of writing fiction and poetry. 
Students may concentrate in either genre 
or both. Alternate years. 



34 



30 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, 
plus some non-fiction prose, written dur- 
ing the years, 1789-1832. Emphasis on the 
work of at least three poets, two novelists, 
and assorted prose writers. Alternate 
years. 

31 MODERN FICTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of 
such major British and American figures 
as Conrad, Forster, Woolf, Lawrence, 
Joyce, Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabokov, 
and Bellow. 

32 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this cen- 
tury, beginning with Yeats and Eliot and 
continuing through such writers as Frost, 
Williams, Moore, Stevens, Auden, 
Lowell, Roethke, Thomas, Ginsberg, and 
Rich. Alternate years. 

33 COMEDY, TRAGEDY, 

AND THE MODERN THEATRE 

Introduction to the theories of comedy 
and tragedy as those theories help us to 
deepen our response to the theatre. Major 
focus on plays, including musicals, from 
Ibsen and Shaw to the present. Alternate 
years. 

34 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 
Through an examination-literary, social, 
and historical-of selected British and 
American literature by women, this 
course will seek to identify those elements 
which distinguish women's particular 
contribution to the literary canon. Alter- 
nate years. 

35 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis 
on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and 
Criseyde. Some attention to the traditions 
out of which these works arose. Required 
of majors seeking secondary certification 
in English. Alternate years. 

36 SHAKESPEARE 
A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. 
A Iternate years. 

PUBLIC RELATIONS 
AND PUBLICITY WRITING 

Communication and publicity techniques 
in the field of public relations focused on 
writing for the media. The news and 
feature release, newsletter, and house 
organ. Prerequisite: English 18 or consent 
of instructor. A Iternate years. 



38 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS 
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing 
spoken and written English. Classroom 
work supported by weekly tutorials, in 
which the student gains practical ex- 
perience in identifying, diagnosing, and 
correcting basic communications pro- 
blems. Required of majors seeking secon- 
dary certification in English. Alternate 
years. 

40 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student 
and faculty interest. Possible combina- 
tions include: Frost, Hemingway, and 
Faulkner; O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; 
Spenser and Milton; Hawthorne, 
Melville, and Dickens; Woolfe, Forster, 
and Lawrence; Joyce and Yeats. May be 
repeated for credit if the writers are dif- 
ferent. Alternate years. 

41 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 

Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more 
types of literature and as it cuts across 
various epochs. Possible topics include: 
American Novelists and Poets of the Jazz 
Age and Depression; Religion and 
Literature; Gothic Tradition in American 
Literature; Realism in the Novel; Literary 
Modernism; Literature and Mythology; 
The Hero in Literature. May be repeated 
for credit if the topic is different. A Iter- 
nate years. 

77-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a 
profession related to their career interest 
such as law, public relations, journalism, 
and others. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies include The Arthurian 
Legend, Shakespeare's Women, D. H. 
Lawrence, and T. S. Eliot: The Social Vi- 
sion. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

FOR DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Pro- 
cess in Literature and Art and Images of 
Women in the 1890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

AND LITERATURES 

Associate Professors: Flam, Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Barker 

Study of foreign languages and 



literatures offers opportunity to ex- 
plore broadly the varieties of human 
experience and thought. It con- 
tributes both to personal and to inter- 
national understanding by providing 
competence in a foreign language and 
a critical acquaintance with the 
literature and culture of foreign 
peoples. A major can serve as entree 
to careers in business, industry, 
government, publishing, education, 
journalism, social agencies, 
translating, and writing. It prepares 
for graduate work in literature or 
linguistics and the international fields 
of politics, commerce, law, health, 
and area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The 
major consists of at least eight 
courses numbered 10 or above. Ma- 
jors seeking teacher certification and 
students planning to enter graduate 
school are advised to begin study of a 
second foreign language. The depart- 
ment encourages the development in 
breadth of programs, including allied 
courses from related fields or a se- 
cond major, and also individual or 
established interdisciplinary majors 
combining interest in several 
literatures or area or cross-cultural 
studies. For example: International 
Studies, 20th Century Studies, the 
Major in Literature. Majors, teacher 
certification candidates, and all 
students are encouraged to spend at 
least a semster of study abroad by ap- 
plying to one of the many programs 
available. The department maintains 
a file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literature 25, French 
28, and Spanish 28. 

Foreign Language and Literatures 

25 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental 
authors as Cervantes, Dostoevsky, 
Chekhov, Dante, Ibsen, Proust, Gide, 
Kafka, Hesse, Goethe, Sartre, Camus, 
Brecht, and Ionesco. Works read in 
English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or 
topic; recent topics have been existen- 
tialism, modernism, and drama. Prere- 
quisite: None. May be repeated for credit 



35 



with consent of instructor. May be ac- 
cepted toward the English major with 
consent of the Department of English. 

38 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: 
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS 
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and teaching. 
Discussion and application of language 
teaching techniques, including work in the 
language laboratory. Designed for future 
teachers, of one or more languages and 
normally taken in the junior year. 
Students should arrange through the 
Department of Education to fulfill in the 
same semester the requirements of a par- 
ticipation experience in area schools. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 



French 

A major consists of at least eight 
courses numbered 10 or above, in- 
cluding at least one numbered 40 or 
above. Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 25 and 38 may be included 
in the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching must pass courses 23, 31, 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 
38, and at least two courses numbered 
40 or above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY 

The aim of the course is to acquire the 
fundamentals of the language with a view 
to using them. Regular practice in speak- 
ing, understanding, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE 

Review and development of the fun- 
damentals of the language for immediate 
use in speaking, understanding, and 
reading with a view to building confidence 
in self-expression. Prerequisite: French 2 
or equivalent. 

20 CONVERSATION 

Designed to develop conversational fluen- 
cy and comprehension through small 
discussions focusing on topics from 
readings in modern French culture, such 
as French social attitudes and French- 
American cultural differences. Some at- 
tention to grammar and writing. Prere- 
quisite: French II or equivalent. 



23 



INTRODUCTION TO LITERARY 

STUDIES 

Studies in French literature with emphasis 

on critical reading and interpretation. 

Discussions, lectures, oral exposes, 

papers. Prerequisite: French 20 or 

equivalent. 



28 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structures and 
cultural attitudes in contemporary French 
society. Materials studied may include 
such documents as newspaper articles, in- 
terviews and sociological surveys, and 
readings in history, religion, an- 
thropology, and the arts. Some attention 
to the changing education system and the 
family and to events and ideas which have 
shaped French society. May include some 
comparative study of France and the 
United States. 

English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribu- 
tion requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, 
papers, and interviews in French for 
students with sufficient language skill. 
Can be applied toward the foreign 
language distribution requirement. Prere- 
quisite: French 10 or equivalent com- 
petency as determined by the department. 

31 FRENCH GRAMMATICAL 
STRUCTURE 

Study of phonetics and grammatical rules 
and their practical application in speaking 
and writing. Recommended for all ma- 
jors. 

41 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 
MIDDLE AGES AND THE 
RENAISSANCE 

A study of selected works from La Chan- 
son de Roland to Montaigne. Prere- 
quisite: French 23 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

43 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 
17TH CENTURY 

A study of major texts of the period: 
preciosity, the origins and theories of 
French classicism, Corneille, Pascal, 
Descartes, Classical tragedy, and comedy: 
Racine, Moliere, LaFontaine, Mme. de 
La Fayette, La Bruyere. Prerequisite: 
French 23 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

45 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 
I8TH CENTURY 

The literary expression of ideas: Montes- 
quieu, Voltaire, Rousseau, and the En- 
cyclopedists. Prerequisite: French 23 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

47 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 
I9TH CENTURY 

The dimensions of the Romantic sensibili- 
ty: Musset, Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Sten- 
dhal. Realism and Naturalism in the 
novels of Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in 
the poetry of Baudelaire, Rimbaud, 
Verlaine, and Mallarme. Prerequisite: 



French 23 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

48 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the 
turn of the century to Existentialism and 
the Theatre of the Absurd, Giraudoux, 
Anouilh, Sartre, Camus, Beckett, 
Ionesco, Genet, Adamov, and others. 
Prerequisite: French 23 or consent of in- 
structor. A Iternate years. 

49 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 
20TH CENTURY 

Representative poets and novelists of 
modern France. Readings selected from 
the works of authors such as Proust, 
Gide, Aragon, Giono, Mauriac, Celine, 
Malraux, Saint-Exupery, Camus, the 
"new novelists" (Robbe-Grillet, Butor, 
Sarraute, Le Clezio), and the poetry of 
Apollinaire, Val6ry, the Surrealists 
(Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Char), Saint- 
John Perse, Supervielle, Prevert, and 
others. Some attention to works of 
French-speaking African writers. Prere- 
quisite: French 23 or consent of instruc- 
tor. A Iternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies in French in- 
clude translation, existentialism, the 
classical period, enlightenment literature, 
and Saint-Exupery. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 



German 

A major consists of eight courses 
numbered 10 or above. Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 38 and 
one unit of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 25 may be included in the 
major. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching must pass courses 3 1 , 33, 
34, and Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 38. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

10-il INTERMEDIATE 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in 
speaking, understanding, and reading 



36 



with a view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: German 2 or 
equivalent. 

20 CONVERSATION 

Designed to develop aural comprehension 
and conversational fluency. Readings and 
discussions on topics of contemporary 
society in Germany, Switzerland, and 
Austria. Some attention to grammar and 
writing. Prerequisite: German 11 or 
equivalent. 

31 GERMAN GRAMMATICAL 
STRUCTURE 

Study of intonation, complex gram- 
matical rules and their practical applica- 
tion, stylistics, and a brief survey of the 
development of the language. Recom- 
mended for all majors. 

33 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of German literature, 
representative authors, and major 
cultural developments in Germany, 
Austria, and Switzerland. The course 
deals with literature from the Early Mid- 
dle Ages through the 18th century. Prere- 
quisite: German 20 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

34 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of German literature, 
representative authors, and major 
cultural developments in Germany, 
Austria, and Switzerland. The course 
deals with the literature from the 19th 
century to the present. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 20 or consent of instructor. 

40 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical 
period and later. Readings in the major 
works. Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or 
consent of instructor. 

41 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das ktassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, 
Goethe, and Schiller. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 20. 

42 MODERN GERMAN DRAMA 

The emergency of modern drama com- 
mencing with Buchner and leading to 
Brecht. Prerequisite: German 20. 

43 THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: 
German 20. 



45 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: 
German 33 or 34 or consent of instructor. 

47 MODERN GERMAN LITERATURE 
A study of the major movements and 
writers from Naturalism, Expressionism, 
and the postwar period. Hauptmann, 
Rilke, Mann, Hesse, Kaiser, Boll, Grass, 
Handke, and others. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 33 or 34 or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies in German in- 
clude Callicism, Germanic Mythology, 
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, 
and Durrenmatt. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. 

1-2 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 
grammar and readings of selected 
passages of the Greek text. Alternate 
years. 

1 1 READINGS IN THE SYNOPTIC 
GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the Synoptic 
tradition in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 2 
or equivalent. Alternate years. 

12 READINGS IN THE PAULINE 
EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul 
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 11 or 
equivalent. Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. 

1-2 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected 
passages of the Hebrew text. Alternate 
years. 

11-12 INTERMEDIATE OLD 
TESTAMENT HEBREW 
A critical reading of the Hebrew text with 
special attention being given to exegetical 
questions. The text read varies from year 
to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 2 or 
equivalent. Alternate years. 



Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses 
numbered 10 or above, including at 
least two numbered 33 or above. 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 38 
may be included. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 25 does not count 
toward the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching in secondary school must 
pass Foreign Language and 
Literatures 38, Spanish 31, and one 
from 33, 34, or 35. 

The specific courses from those 
numbered 31 or above which are of- 
fered in a given year are selected in 
consideration of the curriculum re- 
quirements and career needs of ad- 
vanced students. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in 
speaking, understanding, and reading 
with a view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: Spanish 2 or 
equivalent. 

20 CONVERSATION 

The purpose of this course is to improve 
the student's ability in spontaneous con- 
versations, focusing on everyday activities 
and matters of current concern as sug- 
gested in readings from Latin American 
and peninsular sources. Vocabulary 
building is stressed. Prerequisite: Spanish 
1 1 or equivalent. 

28 SPAIN 

To introduce students to the Spanish peo- 
ple — their values, customs, and institu- 
tions, with reference to the major socio- 
economic, political, and artistic forces 
governing present-day Spain. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish 20 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternates with Spanish 29. 

29 MEXICO 

To introduce students to our most impor- 
tant Latin-American neighbor. History, 
literature, art, and music, principally 
covering the period from the Spanish con- 
quest. Prerequisite: Spanish 20 or consent 
of instructor. Alternates with Spanish 
28. 



37 



31 SPANISH GRAMMATICAL HISTORY 

STRUCTURE 

Study of intonation, complex gram- 
matical rules and their practical applica- 
tion, and a brief survey of the develop- 
ment of the language. Recommended for 
all majors. 

33 SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish literature, 
representative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature from the beginning 
through the 17th century. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 20 or consent of instructor. 

34 SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 
Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish literature, 
representative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature from the 18th century 
to the present. Prerequisite: Spanish 33 or 
consent of instructor. 

35 SURVEY OF SPANISH AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish-American 
literature, representative authors, and 
major socio-economic developments. The 
course deals with the literature, expecially 
the essay and poetry, from the 16th cen- 
tury to the present. Prerequisite: Spanish 
20 or consent of the instructor. 

44 SPANISH LITERATURE OF THE 
GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and prin- 
cipal literary figures in the poetry, prose, 
and drama of the 16th and 17th centuries. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 33 or consent of the 
instructor. 



Associate Professors: Larson, Piper 

(Chairman) 

Assistant Professor: Morris 

A major consists of 10 courses, in- 
cluding 10, 11, and 45. At least seven 
courses must be taken in the depart- 
ment. The following courses may be 
counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: American Studies 10, 
Political Science 39, Religion 28 and 
46. Other appropriate courses outside 
the department may be counted upon 
departmental approval. For history 
majors who student teach in history, 
the major consists of nine courses. In 
addition to the courses listed below, 
special courses, independent study, 
and honors are available. Special 
courses recently taught and an- 
ticipated include a biographical study 
of European Monarchs, the Euro- 
pean Left, the Industrialization and 
Urbanization of Modern Europe, 
Utopian Movements in America, the 
Peace Movement in America, The 
Vietnam War, and American Legal 
History. History majors are en- 
couraged to participate in the intern- 
ship program. 



45 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 
Readings of important works of drama, 
poetry, and prose from the major periods \2 
of 19th and 20th century Spanish and 
I atin- American literature. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 34, 35. or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

Recent studies include literary, linguistic, '3 
and cultural topics and themes such as ur- 
ban problems as reflected in the modern 
novel. 



10 EUROPE 1500-1815 
An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of 
Europe and its relations with other areas 
of the world from 1500 to 1815. 

11 EUROPE 1815-Present 
An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of 
Europe and its relations with other areas 
of the world from 1815 to the present. 



90-99 



INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



UNITED STATES HISTORY 1603-1877 
A study of the men, measures, and 
movements which have been significant in 
the development of the United States be- 
tween 1603 and 1877. Attention is paid to 
t he problems of minority groups as well as 
to majority and national influences. 

UNITED STATES HISTORY 

1877-Present 

A study of the men, measures, and 
movements which have been significant in 
l he development of the United States 
since 1877. Attention is paid to the prob- 
lems of minority groups as well as to ma- 
jority and national influences. 



20 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, in- 
cluding the foundations of the western 
tradition in Greece, the emergence and ex- 
pansion of the Roman state, its experience 
as a republic, and its transformation into 
the Empire. The course will focus on the 
social and intellectual life of Greece and 
Rome as well as political and economic 
changes. Alternate years. 

22 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND ITS 
NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolu- 
tion of the Roman Empire to the mid- 1 5th 
century. The course will deal with the 
growing estrangement of western Catholic 
Europe from the Byzantium and Islam, 
culminating in the Crusades; the rise of 
the Islamic Empire and its later fragmen- 
tation; the development and growth of 
feudalism; the conflict of empire and pap- 
cy, and the rise of towns. Alternate years. 

23 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF THE 
WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, 
economic, social, and cultural history of 
Europe from 1900-1945. Topics include 
the rise of irrationalism, the origins of the 
First World War, the Communist and 
Fascist Revolutions, and the attempts to 
preserve peace before 1939. Prerequisite: 
History 1 1 or consent of instructor. 

24 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, 
economic, social, and cultural history of 
Europe since 1945. Topics include the 
post-war economic recovery of Europe, 
the Sovietization of Eastern Europe, the 
origins of the Cold War, decolonization, 
and the flowering of the welfare state. 
Prerequisite: History 1 1 or consent of in- 
structor. 

25 FRENCH REVOLUTION AND 
NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and in- 
tellectual background of the French 
Revolution, a survey of the course of 
revolutionary development, and an 
estimate of the results of the Napoleonic 
conquests and administration. Prere- 
quisite: History 10 or consent of instruc- 
tor. A llernale years. 

26 COLONIAL AMERICA AND THE 
REVOLUTIONARY ERA 

The establishment of British settlements 
on the American continent, their history 
as colonies, the causes and events of the 
American Revolution, the critical period 
following independence, and proposal 
and adoption of the United States Con- 
stitution. Alternate years. 



38 



27 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 
This course begins with the Progressive 
Era and includes the political, economic, 
and social developments in the 20th cen- 
tury. Emphasis will be placed on the 
domestic and international demands 
which have faced the United States in the 
period following World War II. 

28 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participa- 
tion of Afro-Americans in the United 
States. The course includes historical ex- 
periences such as slavery, abolition, 
reconstruction, and urbanization. It also 
raises the issue of the development and 
growth of white racism, and the effect of 
this racism on contemporary Afro- 
American social, intellectual, and 
political life. Alternate years. 

29 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, 
the age of discovery and conquest, 
Spanish colonial policy, the independence 
movements, and the development of 
modern institutions and governments in 
Latin America. Alternate years. 

33 CONFLICT IN WESTERN 
CIVILIZATION 

An in-depth study of the changing nature 
of war and its relationship to the develop- 
ment of Western Civilization since the end 
of the Middle Ages. Particular emphasis 
will be placed on the role of war in the 
development of the modern nation state 
and the origins and nature of total war. 
A Iternate years. 

34 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF EUROPE 
SINCE 1789 

A survey of the development of the 
European-states system and the relations 
between the European states since the 
beginning of the French Revolution. 
Prerequisite: History 1 1 or consent of in- 
structor. A Iternate years. 

35 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870 
An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe 
from the revolutions of 1848 through the 
unification of Germany. The course 
centers on the struggles for power within 
the major states of Europe at this time, 
and how the vehicle of nationalism was 
used to bring about one type of solution. 
A Iternate years. 

37 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 
The theme of the course is the emergence 
of the political and social characteristics 



that shaped modern America. The per- 
sonalities of Thomas Jefferson, John 
Marshall, John Randolph, Aaron Burr, 
and Andrew Jackson receive special atten- 
tion. Special consideration is given to the 
first and second party systems, the decline 
in community cohesiveness, the westward 
movement, and the growing importance 
of the family as a unit of social organiza- 
tion. Alternate years. 

38 CIVIL WAR AND 
RECONSTRUCTION 

The problems and events leading to war, 
the political and military history of the 
war, and the bitter aftermath to the Com- 
promise of 1877. 

39 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 
RELIGION 

The study of historical and cultural 
developments in American society which 
relates to religion or what is commonly 
called religion. This involves considera- 
tion of the institutional and intellectual 
development of several faith groups as 
well as discussion of certain problems, 
such as the persistence of religious bigotry 
and the changing modes of church-state 
relationships. Alternate years. 

40 HISTORY OF RENAISSANCE 
THOUGHT 

A study of the classical, humanist, and 
scholastic elements involved in the 
development of the Renaissance outlook 
on views and values, both in Italy and in 
Northern Europe. The various combina- 
tions of social and political circumstances 
which constitute the historical context of 
these intellectual developments will be 
noted. Alternate years. 

41 HISTORY OF REFORMATION 
THOUGHT 

A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, 
but which are historically related to its in- 
ception, and of the ideas and systems of 
ideas involved in the formulation of the 
major Reformation, Protestant tradi- 
tions, and in the Catholic Reformation. 
Included are the ideas of the humanists of 
the Reformation Era. Alternate years. 

42 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual ex- 
perience of the United States from its col- 
onial antecedents through reconstruction. 
Among the topics considered are 
Puritanism, transcendentalism, com- 
munity life and organization, education, 
and social-reform movements. Prere- 
quisites: two courses from History 12. 13. 
28, or consent of instructor. 



43 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY 

SINCE 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual ex- 
perience of the United States from 
reconstruction to the present day. Among 
the topics considered are social Dar- 
winism, pragmatism, community life and 
organization, education and social reform 
movements. Prerequisites: two courses 
from History 12, 13, 28 or consent of in- 
structor. 

45 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and 
meaning of history. It will open to the stu- 
dent different historical approaches and 
will provide the opportunity to explore 
these approaches in terms of particular 
topics and periods. Majors are required to 
enroll in this course in either their junior 
or senior year. The course is open to other 
students who have two courses in history 
or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typically, history interns work for local 
government agencies engaged in historical 
projects or for the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent topics include studies of the im- 
migration of American blacks, political 
dissension in the Weimer Republic, In- 
dian relations before the American 
Revolution, and the history of Lycoming 
County. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Two recent projects were the Germans in 
Pennsylvania Politics, 1878-1938, and the 
Reign of Tiglath Pileser I (1116-1075 
B.C.). 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment 
of Europe today with study of 
Europe in its relations to the rest of 
the world, particularly the United 
States. It stresses the international 
relations of the North Atlantic com- 
munity and offers the student oppor- 
tunity to emphasize either European 
studies or international relations. The 



39 



program provides multiple perspec- 
tives on the cultural traits that shape 
popular attitudes and institutions. 
Study of a single country is included 
as a data-base for comparisons, and 
study of its language as a basis for 
direct communication with its people. 
The program is intended to prepare 
a student either for graduate study or 
for careers which have an interna- 
tional component. International 
obligations are increasingly assumed 
by government agencies and a wide 
range of business, social, religious, 
and educational organizations. Op- 
portunities are found in the fields of 
journalism, publishing, communica- 
tions, trade, banking, advertising, 
management, and tourism. The pro- 
gram also offers flexible career 
preparation in a variety of essential 
skills, such as research, data analysis, 
report writing, language skills, and 
the awareness necessary for dealing 
with people and institutions of 
another culture. Preparation for 
related careers can be obtained 
through the guided selection of 
courses outside the major in the areas 
of business, economics, foreign 
languages and literatures, govern- 
ment, history, and international rela- 
tions or through a second major. 
Students should design their pro- 
grams in consultation with members 
of the Committee on International 
Studies. 

By completing six to eight addi- 
tional courses in the social sciences 
(which include those courses needed 
to complete a major in economics, 
history, political science, or 
sociology/anthropology) and the re- 
quired program in education, 
students can be certified for the 
teacher education program in social 
studies. By completing a major in the 
foreign language (five or more 
courses) and the education program, 
students can be certified to teach that 
language. The International Studies 
program also encourages participa- 
tion in study-abroad programs, as 
well as the Washington and United 
Nations semesters. 

40~ 



The major includes 
selected as follows: 



1 1 courses 



International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are design- 
ed to provide a basic understanding 
of the international system and of 
Europe's relations with the rest of the 
world. Political Science 25 is re- 
quired. 

Political Science 25: World Politics 
Economics 43: International Trade 
History 34: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 39: American Foreign 
Policy 

Area Courses — Four or two courses 
(if two, then four must be taken from 
International Relations Courses). 
Courses within this group are design- 
ed to provide a basic understanding 
of the European political, social, and 
economic environment. History 11 
and Economics 22 are required. 

History 11: Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 22: Economic Systems of the 

West 
Political Science 20: European Politics 
History 23: Europe in the Era of the 

World Wars 
History 24: Contemporary Europe 



National Courses 

Language 
language. 



Two courses in one 



French 20, plus one course numbered 

23 or above (except 28) 
German 20, plus one course numbered 

3 1 or above 
Spanish 20, plus one course numbered 

31 or above 

Country — One course. The stu- 
dent must select, according to his 
or her language preparation, one 
European country which will 
serve as a special interest area 
throughout the program. The 
country selected will serve as the 
base for individual projects in the 
major courses wherever possible. 

France — French 28: Modern France 
Germany — History 80: Topics in 

German History 
Spain — Spanish 28: Contemporary 

Hispanic Life 



Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international 
relations courses not yet taken, 
History 10, 32, 33; Economics 23, 45; 
Political Science 26, 27, 38, 46; 
related foreign-literature courses 
counting toward the fine-arts require- 
ment and internships. 

49 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the 
senior year, in which students and several 
faculty members will pursue an in- 
tegrative topic in the field of international 
studies. Students will work to some extent 
independently. Guest speakers will be in- 
vited. The seminar will be open to 
qualified persons from outside the major 
and the College. Prerequisite: consent of 
instructor. 



LITERATURE 

Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of 
English, French, German, and 
Spanish. Students can thus explore 
two literatures widely and intensively 
at the upper levels of course offerings 
within each of the respective depart- 
ments while developing and applying 
skills in foreign languages. The major 
prepares students for graduate study 
in either of the two literatures studies 
or in comparative literature. 

The major requires at least six 
literature courses, equally divided 
between the two literatures concern- 
ed. The six must be at the advanced 
level as determined in consultation 
with advisers (normally courses 
numbered 20 and above in English 
and 40 and above in foreign 
languages). In general, two of the ad- 
vanced courses in each literature 
should be period courses. The third 
course, taken either as a regular 
course or an independent study, may 
have as its subject another period, a 



particular author, genre, or literary 
theme, or some other unifying ap- 
proach or idea. Beyond these six, the 
major must include at least two addi- 
tional courses from among those 
counting toward a major in the 
departments involved. Any prere- 
quisite courses in the respective 
departments (for example: English 
20, 21, 22, 23, French 23, German 33, 
34) should be taken during the 
freshman and sophomore years. 
Students should design their pro- 
grams in consultation with a faculty 
member from each of the literatures 
concerned. Programs for the major 
must be approved by the departments 
involved. 

MASS COMMUNICATION 

Professor: Anapol (Chairman) 

The major in mass communication 
combines a liberal arts foundation 
with a professional sequence through 
a selection of courses from the 
Departments of Art, Business Ad- 
ministration, English, Political 
Science, Psychology, Sociology and 
Anthropology, and Mass Com- 
munication. It also draws upon 
specialized courses from the Graphic 
Arts Department of the Williamsport 
Area Community College. Students 
completing the program are qualified 
to pursue either career options or 
graduate study in mass communica- 
tion, advertising, broadcasting, jour- 
nalism, or public relations. 

Students majoring in the Mass Com- 
munication Department must com- 
plete the Core Curriculum and one se- 
quence, as well as the College 
distribution requirements. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 

Two Theory Courses 

MassCommlO Introduction to Mass 

Communication 
MassComm30 Theories of Mass 

Communication 

A Media Regulation Course 

MassComm31 Mass Media Law and 
Regulation 



A Production Course (Choice of one. 
Certain of these courses are required in 
specific sequences.) 

CG0 511 Layout and Design 

CGO 5 1 2 Typographic Composition 
Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

A Writing Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswriting for the Print Media 
Eng 19 Newswriting for the Broadcast 

Media 

PolSci34 Political Newswriting 

Mass Comm 27 Scriptwriting for 

Radio and Television 

A Research Course (Choice of one. 
Certain of these courses are required in 
specific sequences.) 

PolSci48 Public Opinion 

and Polling 

Soc 47 Research Methods 

in Sociology 

Psy 32 or Sensory Experimental 

Psychology or 

Psy 24 Social Psychology 

Bus 45 Marketing Research 

An applied Media Experience Course 

(Choice of one.) 

Mass Comm 48-49 Practicum 

Mass Comm 70-79 Internship 

Mass Comm 80-89 Independent Study 

NOTE: Mass Communication core 
courses may be utilized both to meet the 
core requirements and to complete Se- 
quence requirements. Since some core 
courses must be used to meet sequence re- 
quirements, students should review 
carefully sequence requirements in selec- 
ting courses. 

II. SEQUENCE REQUIREMENTS 

Mass Communication majors must com- 
plete at least one sequence. All sequence 
requirements are in addition to the core 
curriculum but the same course may be 
used to meet the core requirements as well 
as the requirements of sequences. 

Advertising Sequence: 

Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Bus 32 Advertising 

PolSci48 Public Opinion and 

Polling or 
Soc 47 Research Methods in 

Sociology 
GC0 511 Layout and Design 

GC0 512 Typographic Composition 
Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication 
Art 27 Photography I or 

Art 15 Two-dimensional Design 

Bus 47 Creative Advertising is 

strongly recommended, though not 
required, for this sequence. 



Broadcasting Sequence: 

Eng 19 Newswriting for Broadcast 

Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication 

Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law 

and Regulation 

Mass Comm 28 Radio Programming 

and Production 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

Mass Comm 27 Scriptwriting for 

Radio and Television 

Eng 26 Film and Literature or 

Thea 1 1 Introduction to Film 

Journalism Sequence: 

Eng 16 Writing for Special 

Audiences 

Eng 17 Critical Writing 

Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Pol Sci 1 1 State and Local 

Government 

Pol Sci 32 Politics of Cities and 

Suburbs or 

Soc 34 Racial and Cultural Minorities 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 

Art 27 Photography ! 

CGO 5 1 1 Typographic Composition 

Public Relations Sequence: 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 

Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Eng 37 Public Relations and 

Publicity 

Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and 

Polling or 

Soc 47 Research Methods in 

Sociology 

Art 27 Photography I 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

Mass Comm 1 1 Oral Communication 



10 INTRODUCTION TO MASS 
COMMUNICATION 
Theories of the process of mass com- 
munication and introduction to the mass 
media; attention will be given to problems 
of censorship and media ethics. Analysis 
of the mass media's impact on society; 
emphasis will be placed on the social, 
psychological, and political implications 
of the media's shaping influence on man 
and institutions. 



1 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ORAL 
COMMUNICATION 
The dynamics of oral communication. 
The development of elementary principles 
of simple oral communication through 
lectures, prepared assignments in speak- 
ing, and informal class exercises. Utilizes 
videotape sequences for feedback to 
students. 



41 



24 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizatonal, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use of basic equipment to produce 
standard formats on videotape. 

27 SCRIPTWRITING FOR 
RADIO AND TELEVISION 
Analysis of differences between radio and 
television writing requirements, station 
formats, standard program forms, script 
standards, writing and criticism. Alter- 
nate years. 

28 RADIO PROGRAMMING 
AND PRODUCTION 
Contemporary broadcast programming 
techniques including station scheduling, 
program development and analysis, and 
implementation in real and hypothetical 
situations. Emphasis on management 
functions. Alternate years. 

iO THEORIES OF 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
An examination and analysis of current 
theories dealing with the sources, 
receivers, and systems of mass com- 
munication and the nature and function 
of the media audience, its attitudes and 
behaviors. 

31 MASS MEDIA LAW 

AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication 
is controlled in this society. The forces 
which shape, influence, and make policy 
will be considered. Cross-listed as 
Political Science 36. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN MASS 
COMMUNICATION 
Utilization of mass communication prin- 
ciples, techniques, and skills in an applied 
setting through work experience in a com- 
munication agency or organization. This 
experience is coordinated with regular 
class meetings to analyze and evaluate 
relationships between theory and practice. 
Prerequisite: upper division status and 
consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their communications sequence; 
some may work with the student 
newspaper or radio station. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Studies involve research related to the 
communications sequence of the student. 



90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See Index) 
Through special arrangement, the follow- 
ing courses offered at the Williamsport 
Area Community College are available to 
students in the mass communication ma- 
jor only. The WACC courses are taken as 
part of the student's semester schedule 
and are listed with Lycoming offerings 
during registration periods. 

Graphic Arts 

5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techni- 
ques used in preparation of copy for 
reproduction; paste-up and color separa- 
tion overlays. 4 cr. 

512 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold 
(photo). 4 cr. 

521 PROCESS CAMERA 

Concepts and techniques of darkroom 
procedure for reproduction of line and 
halftone copy on process camera. 4 cr. 



MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professors: Getchell, 
Haley (Chairman), Hubbard 
Assistant Professor: Sprechini 
Instructors: Murphy, Troxel 
Part-time Instructor: Dotzel 

The Department of Mathematical 
Sciences offers major programs in 
computer science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of 11 courses: Mathematics 18, 19, 
either 21 or 24, and Computer 
Science 15, 26, 27, 31, 37, 44, 45, and 
46. It is recommended that majors in 
computer science take Computer 
Science 15 in the freshman year. In 
addition, the following cognate 
courses are recommended: 
Mathematics 13, 14, 20, 38, Physics 
27, Philosophy 19, 20, and 
Psychology 37. 



2 COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY 

A study of the role of digital computers in 
society today with primary emphasis on 
what can be done, rather than how to do 
it. The main goal of the course is to make 
the student aware of the growing in- 
fluence which computers are likely to 
have on society in the near future. 
Students with credit for Mathematics 15 
may not receive credit for this course. 
One-half unit of credit. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER 
SCIENCE 

Introduction to programming, utilizing 
BASIC and FORTRAN IV. Topics in- 
clude program structure, computer con- 
figuration, memory allocation, 
algorithms, and applications. Includes 
laboratory experience on the PDP 11/70 
computer. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 5. 

26 PRINCIPLES OF ADVANCED 
PROGRAMMING 

Principles of effective programming using 
PASCAL, including structured program- 
ming, stepwise refinement, assertion pro- 
ving, style, debugging, control structure, 
decision tables, finite state machines, 
recursion, and encoding. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 15. 

27 DATA STRUCTURES 
Representation of data and algorithms 
associated with data structures. Topics in- 
clude representation of lists, trees, graphs 
and strings, algorithms for searching and 
sorting. Prerequisite: Computer Science 
26. 

31 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study and analysis of tabulated data 
leading to interpolation, numerical in- 
tegration, numerical solutions of differen- 
tial equations, and systems of equations. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 15 and 
Mathematics 19. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Mathematics 31. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX 
ALGEBRA 

An introduction to some of the 
algorithms which have been developed for 
producing numerical solutions to such 
linear algebraic problems as solving 
systems of linear equations, inverting 
matrices, computing the eigenvalues of a 
matrix, and solving the linear least- 
squares problem. Prerequisite: Computer 
Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Mathematics 3 7. 



42 



44 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and 
representation of numbers, strings, ar- 
rays, and list structures at the machine 
level; interrupt programming, relocatable 
code, linking loaders; interfacing with 
operating systems. Prerequisite: Com- 
puter Science 26. A Iternate years. 

45 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the 
algorithms used in programming the 
various parts of a computer system. These 
parts include assemblers, loaders, editors, 
interrupt processors, input/output 
schedulers, processor and job schedulers, 
and memory managers. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 27 and 44. Alternate 
years. 

46 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming 
languages. Topics include lexical analysis, 
block structure, grammars, parsing, pro- 
gram representation, and run-time 
organization. Prerequisite: Computer 
Science 27. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 

Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 
10 units of courses in the 
mathematical sciences: Computer 
Science 15, Mathematics 18, 19, 20, 
24, 34, 42, and three other 
mathematics courses numbered above 
20. Students seeking secondary cer- 
tification in mathematics are required 
to complete Mathematics 30 and 36 
and are advised to enroll in 
Philosophy 17. In addition, all ma- 
jors are advised to elect Computer 
Science 15, Philosophy 20 and 33, 
and Astronomy/Physics 25 and 26. 

In addition to the regular courses 
listed below, special courses are occa- 
sionally available on an independent- 
study basis. Recent topics include 
graph theory, discrete probability, ac- 
tuarial mathematics, theory of games 
of chance, and mathematics physics. 



1 CONTINUOUS MODELS 

A survey of the central ideas of the in- 
finitesimal calculus, its historical develop- 
ment, and some of its modern applica- 
tions. Students with credit for 
Mathematics 9 or 18 may not receive 
credit for this course. One-half unit of 
credit. 

5 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and 
decimal numerals, fractions, the real 
number line, factoring, solutions to linear 
and quadratic equations, graphs of linear 
and quadratic functions, expressions with 
rational exponents, algebraic functions, 
exponential functions, and inequalities. 
THIS COURSE IS LIMITED TO 
STUDENTS PLACED THEREIN BY 
THE MATHEMATICS DEPART- 
MENT. One-half unit of credit. 

7 MATHEMATICS IN ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION 

This course is intended for prospective 
elementary-school teachers and is re- 
quired of all those seeking elementary cer- 
tification. Topics include systems of 
numbers and of numeration, computa- 
tional algorithms, environmental and 
transformation geometry measurement, 
and mathematical concept formation. 
Observation and participation in Greater 
Williamsport elementary schools. Core- 
quisite: any education course numbered 
40 or above which is specifically required 
for elementary certification or consent of 
instructor. 

9 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus con- 
cepts with applications to business, 
biology, and social-science problems. Not 
open to students who have completed 
Mathematics 18. Prerequisite: credit for 
or exemption from Mathematics 5. Alter- 
nate years. 

12 FINITE MATHEMATICS FOR 
DECISION MAKING 

An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving 
calculus, which are used in business ad- 
ministration, social sciences, and opera- 
tions research. The course will include 
both deterministic models such as graphs, 
networks, linear programming and voting 
models, and probabilistic models such as 
Markov chains and games. Prerequisite: 
credit for or exemption from 
Mathematics 5. 

13 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 
Empirical distributions of measurements, 
probability and random variables. 



discrete and continuous probability 
distributions, statistical inference from 
small samples, linear regression and cor- 
relation, analysis of enumerative data. 
Prerequisite: credit for or exemption from 
Mathematics 5. 

14 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs involving more than 
two random variables. Techniques in- 
clude analysis of variance, analysis of 
covariance, multiple regression and cor- 
relation, introduction to factor analysis, 
and discriminative analysis. Extensive use 
of the PDP1 1/70 computer as a problem- 
solving tool will be included. Prerequisite- 
Mathematics 13. Alternate years. One- 
half unit of credit. 

17 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 
The study of logarithmic, exponential, 
trigonometric, polynomial, and rational 
functions, their graphs, and elementary 
properties. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 5. 

18 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY I 

Differentiation of algebraic functions, 
graphing plane curves, applications to 
related rate and extremal problems, in- 
tegration of algebraic functions, areas of 
plane regions, volumes of solids or 
revolution, and other applications. Prere- 
quisite: a grade of C or belter in 
Mathematics 17 or its equivalent or con- 
sent of instructor. 

19 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY II 

Differentiation and integration of 
transcendental functions, parametric 
equations, polar coordinates, the conic 
sections and their applications, infinite se- 
quences, and series expansions. Prere- 
quisite: a grade of C or better in 
Mathematics 18 or consent of instructor. 

20 MULTIVARIATE CALCULUS WITH 
MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Vectors, linear transformations and their 
matrix representations, determinants, 
matrix inversion, solutions to systems of 
linear equations, differentiation and in- 
tegration of multivariate functions, vector 
field theory and applications. Prere- 
quisite: a grade of C or better in 
Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor. 

21 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and their applications: first-order linear 
differential equations, the Picard Ex- 
istence Theorem, solution by separation 
of variables, solution by numerical 



43 



methods; second-order linear differential 
equations, solution by variation of 
parameters, solution by power series, 
solution by Laplace transforms; system of 
first-order equation, solutions by eigen- 
values; qualitative theory, stability theory 
asymptotic behavior, and the Poincare- 
Bendixon theorem. Besides the usual ap- 
plications in physics and engineering, con- 
siderable attention will be given tc 
modern applications in the social and life 
sciences. Prerequisite: a grade of C or bel- 
ter in Mathematics 19 or consent of in- 
structor. A llernate years. 

23 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, 
complex integration, Cauchy's theorems 
and their applications. Corequisite: 
Mathematics 20. Alternate years. 

24 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature 
of mathematical systems, essentials of 
logical reasoning, and axiomatic founda- 
tions of set theory. Other topics frequent- 
ly included are approaches to the concepts 
of infinity and continuity, and the con- 
struction of the real number system. The 
course serves as a bridge from the elemen- 
tary calculus to advanced courses in 
algebra and analysis. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor. 

30 TOPICS OF GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean 
geometry, and an introduction to related 
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 18. 
A Iternale years. 

31 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study and analysis of tabulated data 
leading to interpolation, numerical in- 
tegration, numerical solutions of differen- 
tial equations, and systems of equations. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science IS and 
Mathematics 19. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Computer Science 31. 

32-33 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II 
A study of probability, discrete and con- 
tinuous random variables, expected 
values and moments, sampling, point 
estimation, sampling distributions, inter- 
val estimation, test of hypotheses, regres- 
sion and linear hypotheses, experimental 
design models. Corequisite: Mathematics 
20. A llernate years. 

34 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings. 
fields, and vector spaces and functions 
which preserve their structure. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 24. 



36 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS IN 
SECONDARY EDUCATION 

A course designed for mathematics ma- 
jors who are planning to teach at the 
secondary level. Emphasis will be placed 
on the mathematics that form the founda- 
tion of secondary mathematics. Ideas will 
be presented to familiarize the student 
with various curriculum proposals, to 
provide for innovation within the existing 
curriculum, and to expand the boundaries 
of the existing curriculum. Open only to 
junior and senior mathematics majors 
enrolled in the secondary-education pro- 
gram. Alternate years. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX 
ALGEBRA 

An introduction to some of the 
algorithms which have been developed for 
producing numerical solutions to such 
linear algebraic problems as solving 
systems of linear equations, inverting 
matrices, computing the eigenvalues of a 
matrix, and solving the linear least 
squares problem. Prerequisite: Computer 
Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Computer Science 3 7. 

38 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 
Queuing theory, including simulation 
techniques; optimization theory, in- 
cluding linear programming, integer pro- 
gramming, and dynamic programming; 
game theory, including two-person zero- 
sum games, cooperative games, and 
multiperson games. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 12 or Mathematics 20. 
A llernate years. 

42 REAL ANALYSIS 

A rigorous analysis of the basic concepts 
of real variable calculus; the real number 
system as a complete, ordered field; the 
topology of Euclidean space, compact 
sets, the Heine-Borel Theorem; continui- 
ty; the Intermediate Value Theorem; 
derivatives, the Mean Value Theorem; 
Riemann integrals, the Fundamental 
Theorem of Calculus; infinite series, and 
Taylor's theorem. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 24. 

48 SEMINAR 

Topics in modern mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor. A different topic 
is selected each semester. This semester is 
designed to provide junior and senior 
mathematics majors and other qualified 
students with more than the usual oppor- 
tunity for concentrated and cooperative 
inquiry. Prerequisite: consent of instruc- 
tor. One-half unit of credit. This course 
may he repeated for credit. 



70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 



MUSIC 

Assistant Professors: Boerckel, Jex, 
Thayer (Chairman) 
Part-time Instructors: Gallup, Lakey, 
Nacinovich, Russell, Serang 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of theory, applied 
music, music history, and music 
ensemble. A minimum of eight 
courses (exclusive of applied music 
and ensemble) is required, and these 
must include Music 10, 11, 17, 22, 
and any two from 35, 36, 37, 38. 
Music 17 is not required of the music 
major who completes Music 35, 36, 
37, and 38. Each major must par- 
ticipate in an ensemble (Music 68 
and/or 69) and take one hour of ap- 
plied music per week for a minimum 
of four semesters. (See Music 60-66). 
The major must include at least one- 
half hour of piano in the applied pro- 
gram unless a piano proficiency test is 
requested and passed. Anyone declar- 
ing music as a second major must do 
so by the beginning of the junior 
year. 



10-11 MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two-semester course open to all 
students. An examination of the fun- 
damental components and theoretical 
concepts of music. The student will 
develop musicianship through application 
of applied skills. (Music 10 is prerequi\itc 
to Music III. 

16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and techni- 
ques of music. Examples drawn from 
various periods and styles are designed to 
enhance perception and appreciation 
through careful and informed listening. 

17 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of Western music 
from the Middle Ages to the present for 
the major or non-major. 



44 



18 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music, 
from pre-Revolutionary days through 
World War I. Areas explored will include 
Indian, African, and European roots in- 
fluencing the serious music for small and 
large ensembles, the development of show 
music from minstrels to Broadway 
musicals, the evolution of "Tin Pan 
Alley," and the beginnings of jazz. Alter- 
nate years. 

19 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. 
American Music II will cover post- World 
War I days to the present. Areas explored 
will include indigenous serious music for 
small and large ensembles, the mature 
Broadway musical, the evolution of jazz, 
the development of rock, and the fusion 
of musical styles in the 1970's. Alternate 
years. 

20-21 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 
course moving toward newer uses of 
music materials. Prerequisite: Music 11. 
Alternate years. 

22 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

Largely a non-technical introduction to 
electronic music designed for the major 
and non-major. The course traces the 
development of electronic music, in- 
troduces the student to simple tape- 
splicing and recorder manipulation, and 
progresses to the present-day synthesizer 
and multitrack techniques. Students will 
work collectively and individually in the 
electronic studios. Alternate years. 

30 COMPOSITION 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and in- 
strumental forms. The beginning of the 
course requires students to indentify and 
use the techniques developed by major 
composers of the 20th century. Students 
begin developing a personal style of com- 
position in the remainder of the semester. 
One composition by each class member 
will be presented in a New Works recital 
toward the end of the semester. Prere- 
quisite: Music 10-11 or consent of instruc- 
tor. A Iternate years. 

31 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conduc- 
ting with frequent opportunity for prac- 
tical experience. The College music 
organizations serve to make performance 
experience possible. Prerequisite: Music 
10-11 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 



33 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

An in-depth study of the Moog syn- 
thesizer, including alternating and direct 
current, signal generators and the 
characteristics of their waveforms, con- 
trol voltage and its sources, the transient 
and periodic modulations. Basic mixing 
and filtering techniques will be examined. 
Students will be assigned studio hours to 
complete the recording assignments. 
Prerequisite: Music 22. Alternate years. 

35 MUSIC HISTORY TO J.S. BACH 

A survey of Western music from 
Gregorian chant to the masterworks of 
Handel and Bach. Church music of the 
Middle Ages, Renaissance, and Baroque 
periods is of primary importance with the 
origins of instrumental music and opera 
receiving secondary consideration. Prere- 
quisite: Music 17 or consent of instructor. 
A Iternate years. 

36 MUSIC HISTORY OF THE 
18TH CENTURY 

The symphonies, operas, chamber music, 
and piano works of Haydn, Mozart, and 
Beethoven are studied within the social 
and cultural climate of late 18th century 
Europe. Rococo music in France and Italy 
will be considered with the expressive style 
of Germany and Austria. Prerequisite: 
Music 17 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

37 MUSIC OF THE 19TH CENTURY 

A study of the music of the Romantic 
period with emphasis on Beethoven, 
Schubert, Chopin, Berlioz, Liszt, 
Schumann, Brahms, Wagner, Verdi, 
Tchaikovsky, and others. Close examina- 
tion of short lyric forms, program music, 
opera, and the sonata genre. Prerequisite: 
Music 17 or consent of instructor. A Iter- 
nate years. 

38 MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY 
Beginning with Debussy, Strauss, Mahler, 
and Sibelius, the course traces some of the 
main currents in the music of our time. 
Emphasis given to such composers as 
Stravinsky, Bartok, Ives, Shostakovich, 
Berg, Gershwin, and others. Prerequisite: 
Music 17 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

39 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modern orchestral instruments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in in- 
strumentation. The College music 
organizations serve to make performance 
experience possible. Prerequisite: Music 
10-11 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 



40 COUNTERPOINT 

A study of the five species in two-, three- 
and four-part writing. Emphasis is placed 
upon the 16th century writing style. Prere- 
quisite: Music 10-11 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

42 ELECTRONIC MUSIC III 

An introduction to acoustic theory, echo 
technique, location modulation, applica- 
tion of equalization, phasing, and 
microphones. The student will write and 
perform an electronic composition utiliz- 
ing real-time networks. Prerequisite: 
Music 33. Alternate years. 

43 ELECTRONIC MUSIC IV 

A study of major compositions and 
genres of electronic music. The student 
will complete an original composition 
based upon a study of these techniques 
and forms. Prerequisite: Music 42. Alter- 
nate years. 



Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of performance in piano, 
voice, organ, strings, woodwinds, 
and percussion is designed to develop 
sound technique and a knowledge of 
the appropriate literature for the in- 
strument. Student recitals offer op- 
portunities to gain experience in 
public performance. Music majors 
and other students qualified in per- 
formance may present formal 
recitals. 

Credit for applied music courses 
(private lessons) and ensemble (choir 
and band) is earned on a fractional 
basis. For a description of this, see 
page 9. An applied course or ensem- 
ble should NOT be substituted for an 
academic course, but should in every 
case be in addition to the normal four 
academic courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 60-66) as follows: 
$90 per semester for a half-hour 
lesson per week. Private lessons are 
given for 13 weeks. 
60 Piano 61 Voice 62 Strings 63 
Organ 64 Brass 65 Woodwinds 66 
Percussion 

68 CHORAL ENSEMBLE 
(CHOIR) 

Participation in the College choir is 
designed to enable any student possessing 

45 



at least average talent an opportunity to 
study choral technique. Emphasis is plac- 
ed upon acquaintance with choral 
literature, tone production, diction, and 
phrasing. Students desiring credit for 
choir are allowed a maximum of one hour 
per semester. A student who is enrolled in 
choir and not band should elect Music 
68-B (one hour credit). Students enrolled 
in both band and choir should elect 68-A 
and 69-A (one-half hour in each). 

69 INSTRUMENTAL ENSEMBLE 
(BAND) 

The College band allows students with 
some instrumental experience to become 
acquainted with good band literature and 
develop personal musicianship through 
participation in group instrumental activi- 
ty. Students desiring credit for ensemble 
are allowed a maximum of one hour per 
semester. A student who is enrolled in 
band, but not choir, should elect Music 
69-B (one hour credit). A student enrolled 
in both band and choir should elect 68-A 
and 69-A (one-half hour in each). 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
FOR DEPARTMENTAL 
HONORS (See Index) 



NEAR EAST CULTURE AND 
ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East Culture and Ar- 
chaeology interdisciplinary major is 
designed to acquaint students with 
the "cradle of Western civilization," 
both in its ancient and modern 
aspects. Majors will complete a 
minimum of eight to 10 courses 
related to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in 
their departmental sections and in- 
clude: 

I. Four courses (semesters) in 
language and cultural from: 
History and Culture of the An- 
cient Near East (Religion 28) 
History of Art (Art 22) 
Ancient History (History 20) 
Old Testament Faith and History 
(Religion 13) 

46 



Judaism and Islam (Religion 24) 
Two semesters of foreign 
language (Hebrew 1, 2 or Greek 
1,2) 

2. Two courses (semesters) in ar- 
chaeology from: 

Bible, Archaeology and Faith 
(Religion 46) 

Special Archaeology courses, 
such as independent studies or in 
May term or summer sessions in 
the Near East. 

3. Two courses (semesters) in the 
cooperating departments (art, 
history, political science, religion 
and sociology-anthropology) or 
related departments. These two 
courses, usually taken in the 
junior or senior years, can be in- 
dependent study. Topics should 
be related either to the ancient or 
the modern Near East and must 
be approved in advance by the 
committee supervising the inter- 
disciplinary program. The study 
of modern Arabic or Hebrew is 
encouraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by 
the supervisory committee within the 
limits of a 10-course major. The 
number of courses taken within this 
program applicable toward fulfilling 
the College distribution requirements 
will vary according to the selection of 
courses. 



NURSING 

Professor: Rodgers (Chairman) 
Instructor: Pagana 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under 
the usual admission standards and be 
classified as "Pre-Nursing." To be 
considered for admission to the 
Department of Nursing, freshmen 
should follow the nursing curriculum 
for the freshman year in the sequence 
designated. A supplementary applica- 
tion must be submitted to the Depart- 
ment of Nursing by March 1 of the 
freshman year. Students will be 



notified by letter of their admission 
status no later than April 1 . 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 20, 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 
36, 40, 41, 42, and 43 or 80-89. In ad- 
dition, the following are required 
prerequisites for specific nursing 
courses: Chemistry 8, 15, Biology 
13-14, 26, Psychology 10, 17, 
Mathematics 13 and Computer 
Science 15. The religion/philosophy 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Philosophy 19 and 
Religion 20. The history/social 
science distribution requirement is 
met by the required courses: 
Psychology 10 and 17. In addition, 
the student is required to take one 
course from among Sociology/ An- 
thropology 10, 14, 16, 20, or 28. The 
fine arts/foreign language distribu- 
tion requirement can be met by two 
courses in one department from 
among art, literature, music, theatre, 
or in foreign language on the in- 
termediate or higher course level. 

A grade of C or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses in order to 
continue in the nursing program. 
These courses are Nursing 21, 30, 31, 
32, 33, 36, 40 and 41. 

Unless otherwise indicated, nursing 
courses are open only to nursing ma- 
jors. 



20 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION IN 
FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials of normal nutrition and their 
relationship to the health of individuals 
and families. These concepts serve as a 
basis for the development of an 
understanding of therapeutic application 
of dietary principles and the health pro- 
fessional's role and responsibility in this 
facet of client care. Three hours of lec- 
ture. Three-quarter unit. Prerequisites: 
Chemistry 8. 15, or consent of instructor. 
Open to non-nursing majors. 

21 FOUNDATIONS OF PROFESSIONAL 
NURSING PRACTICE 
Introduction of major theoretical 
elements underlying professional nursing 
practice. Focus on the concept of health 
and common health problems recognizing 
the multidirectional influence of the in- 
dividual, family, and environment. In this 
first clinical course the student will utilize 



the nursing process in assisting clients to 
attain a maximum level of functioning. 
Three hours of lecture and five hours 
clinical laboratory. VA units. Prere- 
quisites: Chemistry 8, 15, and Biology 13. 

30-31 NURSING CARE 

OF THE DEVELOPING FAMILY 
Examination of health and nursing needs 
of beginning and developing families. 
Emphasis on nursing needs of mothers 
and infants within the family unit as well 
as the common health problems of 
children through adolescence. Three 
hours of lecture and seven and one-half 
hours clinical laboratory, VA units. 
Prerequisite for Nursing 30: Nursing 21, 
Biology 14 and 26. Prerequisite for Nurs- 
ing 31: Nursing 30. 

32-33 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 
Identification of adult health care needs 
and implementation of nursing activities 
based on an understanding of growth and 
development, pathophysiology, com- 
munication skills, interpersonal dynamics 
and psychosocial interventions. Three 
hours of lecture and 7'A hours clinical 
laboratory. VA units. Prerequisite for 
Nursing 32: Nursing 21, Biology 14 and 
26. Prerequisite for Nursing 33: Nursing 
32. 

34 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and 
therapeutics are presented for the various 
classes of drugs. Relationship of phar- 
macological mechanisms to the affected 
biochemical and physiological processes. 
Interactions and toxicologic aspects of 
drug therapy are reviewed. Four hours of 
lecture. One unit. Corequisite: Nursing 
30, 32, or permission of instructor. Open 
to non-nursing majors. 

35 RESEARCH IN NURSING 
Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing and interpreting nursing 
research. Development of a research pro- 
posal focusing on a nursing problem. 
Four hours of lecture. One unit. Prere- 
quisites: Mathematics 13, Computer 
Science 15, and Nursing 30 and 32. 

36 THE NURSE IN THE 
SOCIAL SYSTEM 

Seminar discussions and clinical 
laboratory using the hospital as a pro- 
totype. Theories of social systems. Ex- 
amination of induction into the hospital 
system. Evaluation of standards of care. 
Focus on utilization of change theory. 
Twelve hours of lecture and 96 hours 



clinical laboratory. One unit. Prere- 
quisites: Nursing 31, 33. Required for the 
nursing major and offered only in May 
term. 

40 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 
Examination of disturbed human rela- 
tionships with focus on intrapsychic, in- 
terpersonal and physiologic etiology. Em- 
phasis on advanced therapeutic nurse- 
patient relationships within context of 
family, community, and health care 
systems. Three hours of lecture and 7 'A 
hours clinical laboratory. l'A units. 
Prerequisites: Nursing 31, 33, 36. 

41 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 
Culminating nursifig course with focus on 
utilizing nursing theory in a choice of 
clinical settings. Seminars will provide op- 
portunities for students to share com- 
monalities and unique aspects of profes- 
sional practice. Three hours of lecture and 
7 A hours clinical laboratory. l'A units. 
Prerequisites: Nursing 36, 40. 

42 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the con- 
text of the historical background of the 
profession, the social forces which in- 
fluence nursing, and nursing's impact 
upon society. Two hour seminar. One- 
half unit. Prerequisite: Senior standing. 

43 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed 
to permit students to pursue subjects 
which, because of their specialized nature, 
may not be offered on a regular basis. 
One-half unit. Prerequisite: Senior stan- 
ding. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
IN NURSING 
An opportunity to develop and implement 
an individual plan of study under faculty 
guidance. One-half unit. Prerequisite: 
Senior standing or permission of the 
chairman. 



PHILOSOPHY 

Associate Professors: Griffith 

(Chairman), Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic 
concepts and presuppositions around 
which we organize our thought in 
science, religion, education, morality, 



the arts, and other human enter- 
prises. A major in philosophy, 
together with appropriate other 
courses, can provide an excellent 
preparation for policy-making posi- 
tions of many kinds, for graduate 
study in several fields, and for careers 
in education, law, and the ministry. 
The major in philosophy consists of 
at least eight courses numbered 10 or 
above, of which six must be 
numbered 20 or above and must in- 
clude 21 or 23, 22 or 24, and 49. In 
addition to the courses listed below, 
special courses are often offered. 

5 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic 
and their application to practical reason- 
ing, with primary emphasis on detecting 
fallacies, evaluating inductive reasoning, 
and understanding the rudiments of scien- 
tific method. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS 

An introductory course designed to show 
the nature of philosophy by examination 
of several examples of problems which 
have received extended attention in 
philosophical literature. These topics 
often include the relation of the mind to 
the body, the possibility of human 
freedom, arguments about the existence 
of God, the conditions of knowledge, and 
the relation of language to thought. Some 
attention is also given to the principles of 
acceptable reasoning. 

14 PHILOSOPHY AND PERSONAL 
CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examina- 
tion of a number of contemporary moral 
issues which call for personal decision. 
Topics often investigated include: the 
"good" life, obligation to others, sexual 
ethics, abortion, suicide and death, 
violence and pacifism, obedience to the 
law, the relevance of personal beliefs to 
morality. Discussion centers on some of 
the suggestions philosophers have made 
about how to make such decisions. 

15 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 

An introductory philosophical examina- 
tion of the moral and conceptual dimen- 
sion of various contemporary public 
issues, such as the relation of ethics to 
politics and the law, the enforcement of 
morals, the problems of fair distribution 
of goods and opportunities, the 
legitimacy of restricting the use of natural 
resources, and the application of ethics to 



47 



business practice. Discussion centers on 
some of the suggestions philosophers have 
made about how to deal with these issues. 

16 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examina- 
tion of a variety of moral problems that 
arise concerning the American business 
system. Included are a systematic con- 
sideration of typical moral problems fac- 
ed by individuals and an examination of 
common moral criticisms of the business 
system itself. 



17 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts in- 
volved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical 
of the issues discussed are: Are education 
and indoctrination different? What is a 
liberal education? Are education and 
schooling compatible? What do we need 
to learn? Alternate years. 

18 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various 
philosophical issues and concepts which 
are of special importance in legal con- 
texts. Discussion includes both general 
topics, such as the justification of punish- 
ment, and more specific topics, such as 
the insanity defense and the rights of the 
accused. Readings are arranged topically 
and include both classical and contem- 
porary sources. 

19 ETHICAL ISSUES IN 
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of 
the ethical issues which arise as a result of 
contemporary medical and biological 
technology. Typical of these issues are 
euthanasia, behavior control, patient 
rights, experimentation on humans, fetal 
research, abortion, genetic engineering, 
population control, and distribution of 
health resources. 

20 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modern symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. 
Included are truth-functional relations, 
the logic of propositional functions, and 
deductive systems. Attention is also given 
to various topics in the philosophy of 
logic. 

21 ANCIENT GREEK ETHICAL AND 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 
An examination of the ethical and 
political views of Socrates, Plato, and 
Aristotle. Considerable attention is paid 
to the relationship between these views 



and the social and intellectual milieu out 
of which they developed. However, the 
primary emphasis is on understanding the 
philosophical issues raised in selected 
Aristotelian and Platonic texts. Prere- 
quisite: freshmen must have instructor's 
permission. Alternate years. 

22 HISTORY OF MODERN 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

An historical survey of the most impor- 
tant social and political philosophers of 
the modern period. Particular attention is 
paid to the social contract theories of 
Hobbes, Locke, and Rousseau, and some 
consideration will be given to the political 
philosophies of Hegel, Marx, and Mill. 
Prerequisite: freshmen must have instruc- 
tor's permission. Alternate years. 

23 ANCIENT GREEK SCIENCE 
AND METAPHYSICS 

An historical survey of the first attempt 
to understand the physical universe 
scientifically. Particular attention is paid 
to the common origins of philosophy and 
science in the works of the pre-Platonic 
philosophers, to the question of how 
scientific and philosophical thinking is 
distinct from mythological and 
technological thinking, and to the interac- 
tion between philosophy and science in 
formulating the fundamental problems 
about the physical universe and in 
developing and criticizing the various con- 
cepts introduced in attempts to solve 
those problems. Prerequisite: freshmen 
must have instructor's permission. Alter- 
nate years. 

24 EARLY MODERN SCIENCE 
AND METAPHYSICS 
An historical survey of the early modern 
attempt to understand the physical 
universe. Particular attention is paid to 
the continuities and discontinuities bet- 
ween early modern science and 
metaphysics and ancient Greek science 
and metaphysics, to the rationalism- 
empiricism dispute in science and 
metaphysics, and to the interaction bet- 
ween philosophy and science in for- 
mulating fundamental questions about 
the physical universe and in developing 
and criticizing concepts designed to 
answer them. Prerequisite: freshmen must 
have instructor's permission. Alternate 
years. 

31 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN 

CONTEMPORARY PSYCHOLOGY 
Theories in psychology which attempt to 
explain human behavior seem to conflict 
in various ways with religion, with com- 
mon ideas about morality, and with com- 
monsensical ways of explaining human 



behavior. This course examines some of 
those conflicts philosophically. Prere- 
quisite: students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor's permis- 
sion. Alternate years. 

32 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. 
Included are such topics as the nature of 
religious discourse, arguments for and 
against the existence of God, and the rela- 
tion between religion and science. 
Readings from classical and contem- 
porary sources. Prerequisite: students 
without previous study in philosophy 
must have instructor's permission. Alter- 
nate years. 

33 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL 
SCIENCE 

A consideration of philosophically impor- 
tant conceptual problems arising from 
reflection about natural science, including 
such topics as the nature of scientific laws 
and theories, the character of explana- 
tion, the import of prediction, the ex- 
istence of "non-observable" theoretical 
entities such as electrons and genes, the 
problem of justifying induction, and 
various puzzles associated with probabili- 
ty. Prerequisite: students without 
previous study in philosophy must have 
instructor's permission. Alternate years. 

34 SOCIAL AND POLITICAL 
PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation 
of the relation between human nature and 
the proper social and political order. 
Topics studied include the purpose of 
government, the nature of legitimate 
authority, the foundation of human 
rights, and the limits of human freedom. 
Emphasis is placed on the logic of social 
and political thought and on the analysis 
of basic principles and concepts. Prere- 
quisite: students without previous 
philosophy must have instructor's permis- 
sion. 

35 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally 
wrong actions. Central to the course is 
critical consideration of the proposals and 
the rationale of relativists, egoists, 
utilitarians, and other ethical theorists. 
Various topics in metaethics are also in- 
cluded. Prerequisite: students without 
previous study in philosophy must have 
instructor's permission. 



48 



49 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation, carried on by discus- 
sions and papers, into one philosophical 
problem, text, philosopher, or movement. 



A different topic is selected each semester. 
Recent topics include Sidgwick's ethics, 
religious language, Kierkegaard, legal 
punishment. Wittgenstein, personal iden- 
tity and human rights. This seminar is 
designed to provide junior and senior 
philosophy majors and other qualified 
students with more than the usual oppor- 
tunity for concentrated and cooperative 
inquiry. Prerequisite: consent of instruc- 
tor. This seminar may be repeated for 
credit. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Recent independent studies in philosophy 
include Nietzsche, moral education, 
Rawls' theory of justice, existentialism, 
euthanasia, Plato's ethics, and 
philosophical aesthetics. 

90 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 

(Chairman) 

Assistant Professor: Whitehill 

Instructors: Hair, Holmes 

1 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, 
knowledge, and appreciation of sports 
that include swimming, tennis, bowling, 
volleyball, archery, field hockey, soccer, 
golf, badminton, modern dance, skiing, 
elementary games (for elementary 
teachers), toneastics, physical fitness, and 
other activities. Backpacking, cross- 
country and alpine skiing, jogging, and 
cycling are offered on a contract basis. 
Beginning swimming is required for all 
nonswimmers. Students may select any 
activity offered. A reasonable degree of 
proficiency is required in the activities. 
Emphasis is on the potential use of ac- 
tivities as recreational and leisure-time in- 
terests. Two semesters of physical educa- 
tion (two hours per week) are required. 
All physical education classes are open to 
men and women. 

Athletic Training 

Lycoming College established an ap- 
prenticeship program in athletic 
training in 1979 after recognizing two 
conditions: the importance of the 
care and prevention of athletic in- 
juries by trained professionals and 



the career's promising growth poten- 
tial. 

To complete this non-credit pro- 
gram students participate in practical 
as well as classroom work under the 
supervision of Lycoming's certified 
athletic trainer. Students become 
eligible to participate in the National 
Athletic Trainers Association 
(N.A.T.A.) Certification Examina- 
tion to earn the status of an 
N.A.T.A. certified trainer. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professor: Giglio (Chairman) 
Associate Professor: Roskin 
Assistant Professor: Grogan 

The major is designed to provide a 
systematic understanding of govern- 
ment and politics at the international, 
national, state, and local levels. Ma- 
jors are encouraged to develop their 
faculties to make independent, objec- 
tive analyses which can be applied to 
the broad spectrum of the social 
sciences. 

Although the political science ma- 
jor is not designed as a vocational 
major, students with such training 
may go directly into government ser- 
vice, journalism, teaching, or private 
administrative agencies. A political 
science major can provide the base 
for the study of law, or for graduate 
studies leading to administrative 
work in federal, state, or local 
governments, international organiza- 
tions, or college teaching. Students 
seeking certification to teach secon- 
dary school social studies may major 
in political science but should consult 
their advisers and the education 
department. 

A major consists of eight political 
science courses. Political Science 15 is 
required unless exempted by the 
department. Exemptions will be 
granted only if they strengthen the 
student's program. In addition, 
students must take at least one course 
in each of the five areas (A to E) 
below. To encourage familiarity with 
other social sciences, at least two 
courses must be completed from the 



following: American Studies 10; 
Business 35 and 36 (recommended for 
prelaw); Economics 10, 11, 32, 45; 
History 24, 32, 33, 34; Philosophy 21 , 
22; Sociology and Anthropology 26, 
38. 

Students also may take a minor in 
political science. Three minors are of- 
fered: 1) a minor in political science 
consists of any four courses 
numbered above 15 from areas A to 
E, including Political Science 15; 2) a 
minor in foreign affairs consists of 
four courses selected from the follow- 
ing offerings: Political Science 20, 25, 
26, 27, 38 and 39; and 3) a minor in 
legal studies consists of the following 
courses: Political Science 30, 31, 35, 
and 36. 

Students are encouraged to consult 
with department members on the 
selection of a minor. 



15 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 

The behavior and misbehavior of the 
political animal, man. Why he forms 
political communities; how he may im- 
prove and destroy them. Required of all 
political science majors; open to a limited 
number of other interested students. 

A. American Government 

10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 
IN THE UNITED STATES 

An introduction to American national 
government which emphasizes both 
structural-functional analysis and policy- 
making processes. In addition to the 
legislative, executive, and judicial bran- 
ches of government, attention will be 
given to political parties and interest 
groups, elections and voting behavior, 
and constitutional rights. Recommended 
to all social science education majors and 
to those students who have had inade- 
quate or insufficient preparation in 
American government. 

1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 
An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes 
of the states and their subdivisions, 
together with their role in a federal type of 
government. 

30 THE AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL 
SYSTEM 

An analysis of the Supreme Court in the 
American system of government with 
some attention paid to judicial decision 



49 



making. Topics include: judicial review, 
federalism, constitutional limits on 
legislative and executive powers, elec- 
tions, and representation. Alternate 
years. 

31 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as 
Americans? What should they be? A 
frank discussion of the nature and scope 
of the constitutional guarantees. First 
Amendment rights, the rights of criminal 
suspects and defendants, racial and sexual 
equality, and equal protection of the laws. 
Students will read and brief the more im- 
portant Supreme Court decisions. Prere- 
quisite: junior or senior standing or con- 
sent of instructor. 

33 BUREAUCRACY AND PUBLIC 
ADMINISTRATION 
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do 
bureaucracies arise? What has been the 
political impact of growth of bureaucracy 
in government? These questions, among 
other, will be considered in this examina- 
tion of public bureaucracies. This course 
is highly recommended to students plann- 
ing to take an internship in city or county 
government through the political science 
department. 

B. American Politics 



22 



23 



24 



28 



50 



POLITICAL PARTIES AND 
INTEREST GROUPS 
An examination of the history, organiza- 
tion, functions, and methods of American 
political parties. Special attention is 
devoted to the role of organized interest 
groups in the political process. Alternate 
years. 

AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 
A study of the office and powers of the 
president with analysis of his major roles 
as chief administrator, legislator, political 
leader, foreign policy maker, and 
commander-in-chief. Special attention is 
given to those presidents who led the na- 
tion boldly. 

THE LEGISLATIVE PROCESS 
A study of the role of the legislature in the 
framework of the national and state 
governments. Consideration of the in- 
fluence of the parties, pressure groups, 
public opinion, constituencies, the "com- 
mittee system," the "administration," 
and the constitution in the lawmaking 
process. Alternate years. 

CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN 
PUBLIC POLICY I 

Introduction to basic principles of policy 
analysis, including identification of con- 



temporary public policy problems, alter- 
native solutions, formal government and 
other participants in the policy-making 
process, and evaluation of policy impact. 
Includes a detailed case-study analysis of 
one major policy controversy. This is a 
one-half unit course (first seven weeks of 
semester). Students wishing to register in 
full unit course should register for both 
PS 28 and PS 29; those wishing to register 
for a one-half unit course only should 
register for PS 28. Alternate years. 

29 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN 
PUBLIC POLICY II 

A continuation of PS 28 with an emphasis 
on the variety of major issues in public 
policy confronting American government 
and society. Includes a detailed case-study 
analysis of one major public policy con- 
troversy (will differ from that analyzed in 
PS 28). This is a one-half unit course (se- 
cond seven weeks of semester). Prere- 
quisite: PS 28. Students wishing to 
register in a full-unit course should 
register for both PS 28 and PS 29. Alter- 
nate years. 

32 THE POLITICS OF CITIES 
AND SUBURBS 

An examination of the history, legal 
basis, power, forms, services, and pro- 
blems of the cities and their suburbs, with 
special reference to current experiments in 
the solution of the problems of 
metropolitan areas. 

C. Political Theory and Methodology 

35 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination into the nature, sources, 
functions, and limits of law as an instru- 
ment of political and social control. In- 
cluded for discussion are legal problems 
pertaining to the family, crime, deviant 
behavior, poverty, and minority groups. 
Prerequisite: junior or senior standing or 
consent of instructor. 

46 CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL 
IDEOLOGIES 

The growth, development, and current 
status of liberalism, conservatism, na- 
tionalism, socialism, communism, and 
fascism. Alternate years. 

47 THE AMERICAN POLITICAL 
TRADITION 

An examination of the significant ideas 
which have shaped the American political 
tradition from their European origins to 
the present, with emphasis on the in- 
fluence of these ideas in the development 
of American democracy. Special attention 
will be paid to an analysis of contem- 
porary ideological movements: Black 



power, new left, and radical feminism. 
Alternate years. 

48 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 
A course dealing with the general topic 
and methodology of polling. Content in- 
cludes exploration of the processes by 
which people's political opinions are 
formed, the manipulation of public opi- 
nion through the uses of propaganda, and 
the American response to politics and 
political issues. 



D. Comparative Politics 

20 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of East 
and Wast Europe with emphasis on com- 
parison and patterns of government. The 
course will review politics in Northern 
(Britain, West Germany, Sweden), Latin 
(France, Italy, Spain), and Eastern 
(Soviet Union, East Germany, 
Yugoslavia) Europe and attempt to find 
underlying similarities and differences. 

26 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects 
of political life in several countries. The 
way people interact with each other and 
with government, what they expect from 
the system, how they acquire their 
political attitudes and styles, and how 
these contribute to the type of govern- 
ment. Alternate years. 

38 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 

The causes and possible cures for socio- 
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, 
and Latin America. Alternate years. 



E. International Relations 

25 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to in- 
ternational relations with emphasis on the 
varieties of conflicts which may grow into 
war. 

27 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 
The study of several current areas of in- 
ternational tension and conflict, including 
relations among the United States, Soviet 
Union, and China, plus the Middle East 
and whatever new danger spots arise over 
time. Alternate years. 

39 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological 
perspectives, plus an examination of the 
domestic forces shaping U.S. policy. 
A Iternate years. 



F. Non-area Electives 

34 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and 
rewriting of public affairs at the local, na- 
tional, and international levels. There will 
be neither texts nor examinations, but 
short written assignments will be due 
every class meeting. Prerequisite: English 
18 or 19 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

36 MASS MEDIA LAW AND 
REGULATION 

An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication 
is controlled in this society. The forces 
which shape, influence, and make policy 
will be considered. Cross-listed as Mass 
Communication 31. 

G. Special Programs 

70-79 INTERNSHIPS (See Index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning 
situations with a wide variety of public 
and private agencies and organizations. 
Students have served as interns with the 
Public Defender's office, the Lycoming 
County Court Administrator, and the 
Williamsport city government. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local, 
-state, and federal— while past studies 
have included Soviet and world politics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor: Hancock 

Associate Professor: Berthold 

(Chairman) 

Assistant Professor: Ryan 

Part-time Instructor: Vestermark 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It 
is designed to meet the needs of 
students seeking careers in 
psychology or other natural or social 
sciences. It also meets the needs of 
students seeking a better understan- 
ding of human behavior as a means 
of furthering individual and career 
goals in other areas. Certain courses 
are particularly appropriate for ma- 



jors in other areas. Psychology ma- 
jors and others are urged to discuss 
course selections in psychology with 
members of the department to help 
insure appropriate course selection. 
A major consists of Psychology 10, 
31, 32, 36, and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

10 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include: learning, per- 
sonality, social, physiological, sensory, 
cognition, and developmental. 

12 GROUP PROCESSES 
AND INTERPERSONAL 
COMMUNICATION 

The introduction to the research and 
theory from social psychology related to 
small-group dynamics and interpersonal 
communication. Topics covered will in- 
clude communication processes, inter- 
pretation of motivation, conceptualiza- 
tion of individual personalities, problem 
solving and leadership, The first stage of 
the course will focus on research and 
theory; the second half will emphasize the 
development of skills and techniques 
where students become members of a self- 
analytic — practicing the skills and mak- 
ing a case study of the processes involved. 
May term only. 

15 INDUSTRIAL 

AND ORGANIZATIONAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The application of the principles and 
methods of psychology to selected in- 
dustrial and organizational situations. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or consent of 
instructor. 

16 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, func- 
tion, and treatment. The various models 
for the conceptualization of abnormal 
behavior are critically examined. Prere- 
quisite: Psychology 10. 

17 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 
A study of the basic principles of early 
human growth and development. Prere- 
quisite: Psychology 10. 

18 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of 
adolescence; current issues raised by as 
well as about the "generation of youth;" 
research findings bearing on theories and 
issues of growth beyond childhood, and 
self-exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 
10. 



24 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An examination of behavior in social con- 
texts, including motivation, perception, 
group processes and leadership, attitudes, 
and methods of research. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10. 

31 LEARNING EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning processes. The examination of 
the basic methods and principles of 
animal and human learning. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10, Statistics. 

32 SENSORY EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical 
methodology and basic neurophysiologi- 
cal methods as they are applied to the 
understanding of sensory processes. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 10, Statistics. 

33 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 
An introduction to the physiological 
psychologist's method of approach to the 
understanding of behavior as well as the 
set of principles that relate the function 
and organization of the nervous system to 
the phenomena of behavior. The course 
emphasis is on the relationship between 
brain function and the physiological bases 
of learning, perception, and motivation. 
Laboratory experience includes both 
behavioral testing and basic small-animal 
neurosurgical technique as well as 
histological methodology. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10 or consent of instructor. 

34 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, in- 
cluding scale transformation, norms, 
standardization, validation procedures, 
and estimation of reliability. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10, Statistics. 

35 HISTORY AND SYSTEMS 
OF PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and 
the theories and systems that have accom- 
panied its development. Prerequisite: four 
courses in psychology. 

36 PERSONALITY THEORY 

Theories of personality. A comparison of 
different theoretical views on the develop- 
ment and functioning of personality. Ex- 
amined in detail are three general view- 
points of personality: psychoanalytic, 
stimulus-response (behavioristic), and 
phenomenological. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10. 

37 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental pro- 
cesses along the two major dimensions of 

51 



directed and undirected thought. Topic 
areas include recognition, attention, con- 
ceptualization, problem-solving, fantasy, 
language, dreaming, and creativity. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

38 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
the teaching-learning process. Areas con- 
sidered may include educational objec- 
tives, pupil and teacher characteristics, 
concept learning, problem solving and 
creativity, attitudes and values, motiva- 
tion, retention and transfer, evaluation 
and measurement. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10 or consent of instructor. 

39 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 

A detailed examination of the applied 
analysis of behavior. Focus will be on the 
application of experimental method to the 
individual clinical case. The course will 
cover targeting, behavior, base-rating, in- 
tervention strategies, and outcome 
evaluation. Learning-based modification 
techniques such as contingency manage- 
ment, counter-conditioning, extinction, 
discrimination training, aversive condi- 
tioning, and negative practice will be ex- 
amined. Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

41 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and 
research on the psychology of women. 
Topics of discussion include the conflicts 
of women in today's society, 
psychological sex differences, achieve- 
ment motivation, the behaviorial effect of 
hormones, and women in therapy. Prere- 
quisite: Psychology 10. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 
An off-campus involvement in the ap- 
plication of psychological skills and prin- 
ciples in institutional settings. The ex- 
perience includes training in behavior 
modification and traditional counseling 
techniques as applied in prisons, mental 
health centers, and schools for the men- 
tally retarded. Classroom training focuses 
on various therapeutic techniques and on 
students' understanding of themselves in 
the counselor role. Prerequisite: consent 
of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Internships give students an opportunity 
to relate on-campus academic experiences 
to society in general and to their post- 
baccalaureate objectives in particular. 
Students have, for example, worked in 
prisons, public and private schools, coun- 
ty government, and for the American Red 
Cross. 



80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent Study is an opportunity for 
students to pursue special interests in 
areas for which courses are not offered. 
In addition, students have an opportunity 
to study a topic in more depth than is 
possible in the regular classroom situa- 
tion. Studies in the past have included 
child abuse, counseling of hospital pa- 
tients, and research in the psychology of 
natural disasters. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 
Honors in psychology requires original 
contributions to the literature of 
psychology through independent study. 
The most recent honors project was a 
study of the relationship between socio- 
economic status and visual vs. auditory 
learning. 



RELIGION 

Professor: Guerra (Chairman) 
Associate Professor: Hughes 
Assistant Professor: Robinson 

A major consists of 10 courses, in- 
cluding Religion 13, 14, and 20. At 
least seven courses must be taken in 
the department. The following 
courses may be counted toward 
fulfilling the major requirements: 
Greek 11 and 12, Hebrew 11 and 12, 
History 39 and 41, Philosophy 32, 
and Sociology 33. 

13 OLD TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting and in the light 
of archaeological findings to show the 
faith and religious life of the Hebrew- 
Jewish community in the biblical period, 
and an introduction to the history of in- 
terpretation with an emphasis on contem- 
porary Old Testament criticism and 
theology. 

14 NEW TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting to show the 
faith and religious life of the Christian 
community in the biblical period, and an 
introduction to the history of interpreta- 
tion with an emphasis on contemporary 
New Testament criticism and theology. 



20 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, 
and universal standpoints with emphasis 
upon what the dying may teach the living. 
Principal issues are the stages of dying, 
bereavement, suicide, funeral conduct, 
and the religious doctrines of death and 
immortality. Course includes, as op- 
tional, practical projects with terminal pa- 
tients under professional supervision. On- 
ly one course from the combination 20-21 
may be used for distribution. 

21 AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life 
after death in terms of contemporary 
clinical studies, the New Testament resur- 
rection narratives, the Asian doctrine of 
reincarnation, and the classical 
theological beliefs of providence and 
predestination. Religion 20 is recom- 
mended but not required. Only one course 
from the combination 20-21 may be used 
for distribution. 

22 PROTESTANTISM IN THE 
MODERN WORLD 

An examination of changing Protestant 
thought and life from Luther to the pre- 
sent against the backdrop of a culture 
rapidly changing from the 17th century 
scientific revolution to Marxism, Dar- 
winism, and depth psychology. Special at- 
tention will be paid to the constant in- 
teraction between Protestantism and the 
world in which it finds itself. 

23 CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and 
religious background of the formation of 
Christianity and the antecedents of Chris- 
tian belief and practice in post-exilic 
Judaism and in Hellenism. 

24 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and 
expansion of Judaism and Islam with 
special attention given to the theological 
contents of the literatures of these 
religions as far as they are normative in 
matters of faith, practice, and organiza- 
tion. Also, a review of their contributions 
to the spiritual heritage of mankind. 

25 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic 
content of Hinduism, Buddhism, and 
Chinese Taoism with special attention to 
social and political relations, mythical 
and aesthetic forms, and the East-West 
dialogue. 

28 HISTORY AND CULTURE 

OF THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST 

A study of the history and culture of 

Mesopotamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, 



52 



and Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian 
culture to Alexander the Great. Careful 
attention will be given to the religious 
views prevalent in the ancient Near East 
as far as these views interacted with the 
culture and faith of Biblical man. 

30 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of 
psychology in relation to the phenomena 
of religion and religious behavior. The 
course concentrates on religious ex- 
perience or manifestations rather then 
concepts. Tentative solutions will be 
sought to questions such as: What does it 
feel like to be religious or to have a 
religious experience? What is the religious 
function in human development? How 
does one think psychologically about 
theological problems? 

31 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral prob- 
lems with emphasis upon the interaction 
of law and religion, decision making in 
the field of biomedical practice, and the 
reconstruction of society in a planetary 
civilization. 

32 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of 
religion and other disciplines to an issue 
of current concern; current topics include 
the theological significance of law, the 
ethics of love, and the Holocaust. The 
course may be repeated for credit. 

33 ROMAN CATHOLIC THOUGHT 
The development of Thomism, Neo- 
Thomism, and Transcendental Thomism; 
limited attention given to pastoral and ec- 
clesiological issues in the post-conciliar 
era after Vatican II. 

37 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics 
related to the Old and New Testaments. 
Topics include prophecy, wisdom, 
literature, the Dead Sea Scrolls, the 
teachings of Jesus, Pauline theology, 
Judaism and Christian origins, reaction 
criticism — the way the Synoptic Gospels 
and John give final form to their message. 
Course will vary from year to year and 
may be taken for credit a second time if 
the topic is different from one previously 
studied. 

41 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS 

ISSUES 

A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual 
developments in western culture. The con- 
tent of this course will vary from year to 



year. Subjects studied in recent years in- 
clude the theological significance of 
Freud, Marx, and Nietzsche; Christianity 
and existentialism; theology and depth 
psychology, the religious dimension of 
contemporary literature. 

42 THE NATURE AND MISSION OF THE 
CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as 
"The People of God" with reference to 
the Biblical, Protestant, Orthodox, and 
Roman Catholic traditions. 

43 THE EDUCATIONAL MINISTRY OF 
THE CHURCH 

A study of religious education as a func- 
tion of the church with special attention 
given to the nature and objectives of 
Christian education, methods of teaching 
religion, and the relations between faith 
and learning. 

46 BIBLE, ARCHAEOLOGY, AND 
FAITH 

A study of the role of archaeology in 
reconstructing the world in which the 
Biblical literature originated with special 
attention given to archaeological results 
that throw light on the clarification of the 
Biblical text. Also, an introduction to 
basic archaeological method and a study 
in depth of several representative excava- 
tions along with the artifacts and material 
culture recovered from different historical 
periods. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local 
churches under the supervision of the 
pastor and a member of the faculty. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Current study areas are in the biblical 
languages, New Testament theology, 
comparative religions, and the ethics of 
technology. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 
A recent project was on the theology of 
hope with reference to the thought of 
Ernst Bloch and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: McCrary 

Associate Professors: Jo (Chairman), 

Wilk 

Assistant Professor: Strauser 

A major consists of Sociology- 
Anthropology 10, 14, 16, 44, 47, and 



three other courses within the depart- 
ment with the exception of 15, 23, 25, 
and 40. Religion 46 may also be 
counted toward the major. 
Sociology-anthropology majors are 
encouraged to participate in the in- 
ternship program. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, con- 
cepts, and methods in sociology today, in- 
cluding analysis of stratification, 
organization of groups and institutions, 
social movements, and deviants in social 
structure. 



14 INTRODUCTION TO 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of an- 
thropology; its subject matter, 
methodology, and goals. Examination of 
biological and cultural evolution, the 
fossil evidence for human evolution, and 
questions raised in relation to human 
evolution. Other topics include race, 
human nature, primate behavior, and 
prehistoric cultural development. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 

An introduction to the role of law en- 
forcement, courts, and corrections in the 
administration of justice; the historical 
development of police, courts, and cor- 
rections; jurisdiction and procedures of 
courts; an introduction to the studies, 
literature, and research in criminal 
justice, careers in criminal justice. 

16 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social an- 
thropology designed to familiarize the 
student with the analytical approaches to 
the diverse cultures of the world. The 
relevancy of cultural anthropology for an 
understanding of the human condition 
will be stressed. Topics to be covered in- 
clude the nature of primitive societies in 
contrast to civilizations, the concept of 
culture and cultural relativism, the in- 
dividual and culture, the social patterning 
of behavior and social control, an an- 
thropological perspective on the culture 
of the United States. 

20 MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of 
modern American family life, emphasiz- 
ing dating, courtship, factors in marital 
adjustment, and the changing status of 
family members. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 



53 



21 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study 
of the constellation of factors that relate 
to juvenile delinquency causation, handl- 
ing the juvenile delinquent in the criminal 
justice system, treatment strategies, 
prevention, and community responsibili- 
ty. Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology 
10 or consent of instructor. 

22 PEOPLES AND CULTURES OF 
MEXICO 

Examination of the diverse cultures of 
Mesoamerica from preconquest in- 
digenous peoples to modern Mexican 
state, including the rise and fall of Aztec 
and Maya civilization, transformation 
from primitive agriculturalist to peasant, 
concepts of folk society, and culture of 
poverty; an analysis of contemporary 
problems of rural Mexico, and the role of 
peasants in modern revolutionary 
movements. Offered at least once every 
three years. 



23 



24 



25 



26 



INTRODUCTION TO LAW 
ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the 
law of crimes, elements in crime, analysis 
of criminal investigation, important case 
law. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy IS or consent of instructor. 



RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban 
settings. Emphasis is placed upon 
characteristic institutions and problems of 
modern city life. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

INTRODUCTION TO CRIMINAL 
INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced 
criminal justice majors. Emphasis is plac- 
ed on an in-depth study of detection and 
investigation of major crimes. Particular 
attention is placed on the use of 
criminalistics, legal parameters of 
evidence and interrogation, and pro- 
secutory procedures. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 23 or consent of 
instructor. Will not be counted toward the 
sociology/anthropology major. 

SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 
An analysis of the dynamics, structure, 
and reactions to social movements with 
focus on contemporary social 
movements. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 



27 SOCIALIZATION THROUGH THE 
LIFE SPAN 

Examination of the relationship between 
the individual and society in the develop- 
ment of behavior potentials of groups and 
cultures. The course will study the con- 
tinual process of learning how to be 
"human," which occurs throughout the 
life span. A cross-cultural approach is 
utilized to examine the process of acquisi- 
tion of skills, motives, and attitudes 
necessary for role performance in 
childhood and adolescence with an em- 
phasis on young adulthood, adulthood, 
middle age, and old age. Life span 
developmental theory will be used in con- 
junction with socialization theory and 
role theory. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

28 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics 
of the aged as individuals and as members 
of groups. Emphasis is placed upon 
variables: health, housing, socio- 
economic status, personal adjustment, 
retirement, and social participation. 
Sociological, social psychological, and 
anthropological frames of reference 
utilized in analysis and description of ag- 
ing and its relationship to society, culture, 
and personality. 

29 20TH CENTURY CHINESE SOCIETY 
An analysis of the interaction between the 
individual and society undergoing rapid 
social change in the Chinese cultural con- 
text. Topics include Confucian examina- 
tion system and social mobility, the tradi- 
tional Chinese village and family, origins 
of Chinese Marxism and how it has been 
implemented in social institutions of The 
People's Republic of China. Alternate 
years. 

30 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law, condi- 
tions under which criminal laws develop, 
etiology of crime, epidemiology of crime, 
including explanation of statistical 
distribution of criminal behavior in terms 
of time, space, and social location. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

31 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an 
analysis of the social institutions which 
affect their development. Role-analysis 
theory will be applied to the past, present, 
and future experience of women as it 
relates to the role options of society as a 
whole. Students will do an original 
research project on the role of women. 
Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology 10. 
Alternate years. 



32 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all 
societies, and the interrelationships be- 
tween the social institutions within a 
society. The course is divided into two 
basic parts: 1. That aspect which deals 
with the systematic organization of socie- 
ty in general, and 2. The concentration on 
a particular social institution: economic, 
political, educational, or social welfare. 
Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropology 10 
or consent of instructor. 



33 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of 
the relationship of religion to society and 
a survey of sociological studies of 
religious behavior. Prerequisite: 
Sociology- Anthropology 10 or consent of 
instructor. 



34 RACIAL AND CULTURAL 
MINORITIES 

Study of racial, cultural, and national 
groups within the framework of 
American cultural values. An analysis will 
include historical, cultural, and social fac- 
tors underlying ethnic and racial conflict. 
Field trips and individual reports are part 
of the requirements for the course. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 



35 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 
Introduction to psychological an- 
thropology, its theories and 
methodologies. Emphasis will be placed 
on the relationship between individual 
and culture, national character, cognition 
and culture, culture and mental disorders, 
and cross-cultural considerations of the 
concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 16 or consent of instructor. 
Offered at least once every three years. 

36 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student 
with the wealth of anthropological data 
on the religions and world views 
developed by primitive peoples. The func- 
tions of primitive religion in regard to the 
individual, society, and various cultural 
institutions will be examined. Subjects to 
be surveyed include myth, witchcraft, vi- 
sion quests, spirit possession, the cultural 
use of dreams, and revitalization 
movements. Particular emphasis will be 
given to shamanism, transcultural 
religious experience, and the creation of 
cultural realities through religions. Both a 



54 



social scientific and existentialist perspec- 
tive will be employed. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 16 or consent of 
instructor. A Iternate years. 

37 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, 
such as the Iroquois, Plains Indians, 
Pueblos, Kwakiutl, and Netsilik. Changes 
in native lifeways due to European con- 
tacts and United States expansion will be 
considered. Recent cultural developments 
among American Indians will be placed in 
an anthropological perspective. Offered 
at least once every three years. 

38 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the 
student with the techniques of conflict 
resolution and the utilization of public 
power in primitive society as well as the 
various theories of primitive law and 
government. The rise of the state and an 
anthropological perspective on modern 
law and government will be included. The 
concepts of self-regulation and social con- 
trol, legitimacy, coercion, and exploita- 
tion will be the organizing focus. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology- Anthropology 16 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

39 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 
Nature and history of punishment, evolu- 
tion of the prison and prison methods 
with emphasis on prison community, 
prison architecture, institutional pro- 
grams, inmate rights, and sentences. 
Review of punishment vs. treatment, 
detention facilities, jails, reformatories, 
prison organization and administration, 
custody, and discipline. Prerequisite: 
Sociology- Anthropology 15. 

40 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced 
criminal justice major. While the course 
concerns the study of probation and 
parole as parts of the criminal justice 
system and their impact on the system as a 
whole, the primary emphasis is the impact 
on the offender. Particular attention is 
given to diagnostic report writing on of- 
fenders, pre-sentence investigation, of- 
fender classification, and parole plann- 
ing. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy 15 and 39. Alternate years. 

41 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. 
The course will include an analysis of 
poverty, wealth, and power in the United 
States. Particular attention will be given 



to factors which generate and maintain in- 
equality, along with the impacts of 
inequality on the lives of Americans. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 
or consent of instructor. 

42 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK 
Consideration of basic social-work con- 
cepts, principles and techniques of inter- 
viewing, individual case work, group 
work and community organization, 
development of skills, and techniques of 
social work applied to the correctional 
setting. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

43 ALTERNATIVE LIFE STYLES 
Analysis of new life styles in American 
society: life styles of minority groups and 
others who are considered by society to be 
nonconforming. Examination of the 
challenges to conformity and ramifica- 
tions of nonconformity in American 
society. Will include an inquiry into 
behavior which has historically been 
labeled deviant, covering such topics as 
mental illness, addiction to alcohol and 
narcotics, homosexuality, and prostitu- 
tion. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

44 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of 
sociological thought from its earliest 
philosophical beginnings is treated 
through discussions and reports. Em- 
phasis is placed upon sociological thought 
since the time of Comte. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent of 
instructor. 

45 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of an- 
thropological thought from the 18th cen- 
tury to the present. Emphasis is placed 
upon anthropological thought since 1850. 
Topics include evolutionism, historical- 
particularism, cultural idealism, cultural 
materialism, functionalism, struc- 
turalism, and ethnoscence. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 16 or consent of 
instructor. Offered at least once every 
three years. 

46 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF THE 
AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 

Field experience in the analysis of tri- 
cultural communities of Northern New 
Mexico, Southern Colorado, and North- 
eastern Arizona, including the eastern 
Pueblos of New Mexico, Zuni Navajo and 
Apache reservations, isolated Spanish- 
American mountain villages of Northern 
New Mexico, religious ashrams and com- 
munes, and cities of the Southwest and 
Juarez, Mexico. Emphasis upon Taos, 



Rio Arriba, Santa Fe, and Los Alamos 
counties of New Mexico. Prerequisite: 
Sociology 10 or consent of instructor. 
May or summer only. 

47 RESEARCH METHODS IN 

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 
Study of the research process in 
sociology-anthropology. Attention is 
given to the process of designing and ad- 
ministering research and the application 
of research. Different methodological 
skills are considered, including field 
work, questionnaire construction, and 
other methods of data gathering and the 
analysis of data. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 and Mathematics 13 or 
consent of instructor. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies 
in order to effect a synthesis of the stu- 
dent's academic course work and its prac- 
tical applications in a community agency. 
Specifics of the course to be worked out in 
conjunction with department, student, 
and agency. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typical- 
ly work off campus with social service 
agencies under the supervision of ad- 
ministrators. However, other internship 
experiences, such as with the Lycoming 
County Historical Museum, are available. 
Interns in criminal justice work off cam- 
pus in criminal justice agencies, such as 
penal institutions and probation and 
parole departments, under the supervision 
of administrative personnel. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
An opportunity to pursue specific in- 
terests and topics not usually covered in 
regular courses. Through a program of 
readings and tutorials, the student will 
have the opportunity to pursue these in- 
terests and topics in greater depth than is 
usually possible in a regular course. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 



THEATRE 

Professor: Falk (Chairman) 
Assistant Professor: Carlson 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 10 and seven others; a con- 
centration in acting, directing, or 



55 



design is possible. In addition to the 
course requirements, majors are ex- 
pected to participate actively in Arena 
Theatre productions. Majors are 
urged to include courses in art, music, 
psychology, and English, or other 
areas of special interest. 

The fine arts distribution require- 
ment may be satisfied by selecting any 
two of the following recommended 
courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 32, 33 
or other courses with the consent of 
the instructor. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 
Designed as a comprehensive introduction 
to the aesthetics of theatre. From the 
spectator's point of view, the nature of 
theatre will be explored, including 
dramatic literature and the integrated 
functioning of acting, directing, and all 
production aspects. 

1 1 INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film 
technique through lectures and by viewing 
regular weekly films chosen from classic, 
contemporary, and experimental short 
films. 

14 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's 
preparation with emphasis on developing 
the actor's creative imagination through 
improvisations and scene study. 

18 INTRODUCTION TO PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft and the various other aspects 
of play production are introduced. 
Through material presented in the course 
and laboratory work on the Arena 
Theatre stage, the student will acquire ex- 
perience to produce theatrical scenery. 

26 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of 
the director in preparation, rehearsal, and 
performance. Emphasis is placed on 
developing the student's ability to analyze 
scripts, and on the development of the 
student's imagination. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 14. 



28' 



INTRODUCTION TO SCENE DESIGN 
AND STAGECRAFT 
An introduction to the theatre with an 
emphasis on stagecraft. Productions each 
semester serve as the laboratory to pro- 
vide the practical experience necessary to 
understand the material presented in the 
classroom. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or 
consent of instructor. 



31 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES OF PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

A detailed consideration of the inter- 
related problems and techniques of play 
analysis, production styles, and design. 
Offered summer only. 

34 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING 
Instruction and practice in character 
analysis and projection with emphasis on 
vocal and body techniques. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 14. 

35 THEORIES OF THE MODERN 
THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the 
philosophical roots of the modern theatre 
form the birth of realism to the present 
and the influences on modern theatre 
practice. Selected readings from 
Nietzsche, Marx, Jung, Freud, 
Whitehead, Kierkegaard, Sartre, Camus, 
Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, Shaw, 
Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht, Brook, 
Grotowski. Alternate years. 

36 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
DIRECTING 

Emphasis is placed on the student's ability 
to function in preparation and rehearsal. 
Practical experience involves the directing 
of two one-act plays from the contem- 
porary theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 26. 

37 PLAYWRITING AND DRAMATIC 
CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of 
playwriting with an emphasis on creative 
writing, culminating in a written one-act 
play, plus an historical survey of dramatic 
criticism from Aristotle to the present 
with emphasis upon developing the stu- 
dent's ability to write reviews and 
criticism of theatrical productions and 
films. Alternate years. 

38 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
LIGHTING DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design 
with emphasis on their practical applica- 
tion to the theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 
18 or consent of instructor. 

40 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including 
criticism of great authors, that have 
shaped world theatre. Authors to be 
selected on the basis of interest of 
students and faculty. At times, more than 
one author will be treated in a term. 
Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams, Albee. 
Alternate years. May be accepted toward 
English major with consent of English 
department. 



42 ADVANCED STUDIO: COSTUME 
DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, 
elements of design, planning, production, 
and construction of costumes for the 
theatre. Students will participate in the 
design of a production. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 18 or consent of instructor. 

43 ADVANCED STUDIO: PROPERTIES 
DESIGN 

The theory of properties design for the 
stage, including the production of specific 
properties for staging use. Elements of 
design, fabrication, and the construction 
of properties employing a variety of 
materials and the application of new 
theatrical technology. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 18 or consent of instructor. 

44 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 
Preparation of monologues and two- 
character scenes, contemporary and 
classical. The student will appear in major 
campus productions. Prerequisite: 
Theatre 34. 

46 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 
Emphasis will be placed on the student's 
ability to produce a major three-act play 
from the script to the stage for public per- 
formance. Prerequisite: Theatre 36. 

48 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and 
practical design. The student will design 
one full production as his major project. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 28 or 38 and consent 
of instructor. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in 
theatres such as the Guthrie Theatre, Min- 
neapolis, and at the New Jersey 
Shakespeare Festival. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Some recent independent studies have 
been the roles of women as characters in 
drama, scene design, and lighting design 
for an Arena production. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See Index) 
A typical study could be the writing and 
production of an original play. 



56 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at 
Lycoming is administered by the Of- 
fice of Student Services. It is designed 
to respond to a diversity of student 
needs. The six staff members, five of 
whom live on campus, are assigned 
the specific responsibilities of: 

— career counseling and placement; 
— residence life; 

— student activities, student union, 
student government, Intrafraterni- 
ty Council and Panhellenic Ad- 
viser, retention program; 
— religious life, health services, 
study skills program, reading im- 
provement courses. 
All members of the staff are 
available to counsel and advise in- 
dividual students. 

PERSONAL COUNSELING 

All members of the staff of the Office 
of Student Services are qualified and 
available to provide non-therapeutic 
assistance to students with adjust- 
ment problems. A psychiatrist serves 
as a consultant to the staff and is 
available for evaluation of individual 
students who may be in need of pro- 
fessional services. Continuing 
therapy is available through referral 
to public agencies and private clini- 
cians in the Williamsport community. 
Financial arrangements for these 
referral services are made directly by 
the student with the agency and/or 
individual clinician involved. 

HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the 
health service staff at the College is 
provided without cost to the student. 
During the fall and spring semesters, 
the College maintains an out-patient 
service in Rich Hall. It is staffed with 
a registered nurse five days a week 
from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. The College 
physician is available from 1 1 a.m. to 
12 noon, Monday through Friday. At 
other times, emergency care is 
available at the emergency rooms of 
Williamsport and Divine Providence 
Hospitals, located a short distance 



from the campus. The College pays 
the emergency room charge and the 
emergency room physician's fee for 
illness when the health service is clos- 
ed. 

Medical-service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and 
emergency room physician's charges 
(except as indicated above), special 
medications, X-rays, surgery, care 
for major accidents, immunizations, 
examinations for glasses, physician's 
visits other than in the health service, 
referrals for treatment by specialists, 
special nursing services, and special 
services. 

Entering students must provide 
basic health information to the Col- 
lege between the time of admission 
and the beginning of classes of the 
term to which they are admitted. This 
information is secured through par- 
ticipation in the computerized health- 
information service provided by 
Medical Datamation, Inc. New 
students complete the DASH Medical 
Information Questionnaire that is 
mailed to students shortly after they 
have confirmed their admission to 
Lycoming. The completed form is 
sent by the student to Medical 
Datamation together with a check for 
$10. Both the student and the College 
receive reports based on the question- 
naire responses. The student report 
consists of a Medical Database 
Report, a Health Risk Index, and as 
many health information brochures 
as requested. Information provided 
by the student is confidential and is 
available only to qualified health ser- 
vice and student-services personnel. 

STUDY IMPROVEMENT 
SERVICES 

Skills Seminars — The seminars, 
consisting of three one-hour sessions 
on scheduling of time, test-taking, 
and study methods, are scheduled on 
demand for six to 10 students. 

Reading Course — Designed to im- 
prove reading speed and comprehen- 
sion, this three-week course is offered 
at various times during the academic 
year for a fee of $15. 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to 
help students identify their abilities 
and interest, set realistic career goals, 
and plan academic programs to meet 
these goals. Counseling for Lycoming 
students begins in the freshman year. 
In addition to individual guidance, 
the center maintains a library on 
specific careers, employment 
outlooks, and career trends. Services 
offered by the center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— career-planning seminars in 
values clarification, skill 
assessment, and decision mak- 
ing; 

— 2500-volume career library; 

— relaxation workshops and 
assertiveness training; 

— SHARE (Students Having A 
Real Experience), a program 
in which students observe and 
work with a professional in the 
field; 

— placement services to aid 
seniors in implementing their 
career plans; 

— assistance to students in secur- 
ing internships, summer 
employment, and part-time 
employment; 

— speaker's program which 
brings professionals from a 
variety of careers to campus 
seminars; 

— video-cassette programs 
relating to job skills and career 
information; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- 
and professional-school 
catalogs for the United States 
and abroad. 

RESIDENCE AND RESIDENCE 
HALLS 

Students who are single and do not 
live at home are required to live in 
residence halls and eat in the dining 
room. All new resident students are 
forwarded a room-agreement form to 



57 



sign after confirmation of their ad- 
mission to Lycoming. This agreement 
is renewed each spring. Exceptions to 
the residence policy may be granted 
to those students who wish to live 
with relatives, and students who are 
23 years of age or older and have 
established non-resident status. Re- 
quests for such exemptions must be 
submitted to the Assistant Dean of 
Student Services for Residence Life 
before the first day of the term to 
which the student has been admitted. 

Resident students assume respon- 
sibility for their rooms and fur- 
nishings. The College reserves the 
right to enter and inspect any room 
for reasons of damage, health, or 
safety, and to search any room when 
there is reason to believe a violation 
of College rules or the law is occurr- 
ing or has occurred. Charges are 
assessed for damage to rooms, doors, 
furniture, and common areas. 
Wherever possible, damage to dor- 
mitory property will be charged to the 
person or persons directly responsi- 
ble. Damage and breakage occurring 
in a room will be the responsibility of 
students occupying the room. Hall 
and bathroom damages will be the 
responsibility of all students of the 
section where damage occurs. Actual 
costs of repairs will be charged. 

Residence halls are not available 
for occupancy during the vacation 
periods. Quiet hours for study pur- 
poses, which are established by 
residence hall councils or the Office 
of Student Services, are published in 
the student handbook and posted on 
bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the 
College in cooperation with the 
various residence hall councils, which 
share responsibility for developing 
and monitoring regulations, and 
which are organized each fall 
semester before visitation schedules 
are established. 



STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to 
accept responsibilities required of 
adults. The rights of every member of 
the College community are protected 
by established regulations. Although 
the acceptance of the College's stan- 
dards of behavior is an individual 
responsibility, it also calls for group 
responsibility. Students should in- 
fluence their peers to conduct 
themselves responsibly for the collec- 
tive good. 

Students who are unable to 
demonstrate that they have accepted 
these responsibilities or who fail to 
abide by established policies may be 
dismissed at any time or denied read- 
mission for a subsequent term or 
semester. Further, after the conclu- 
sion of any term or semester, the Col- 
lege may deny a student the privilege 
of attending any subsequent term or 
semester when the administration 
deems this to be in the best interest of 
the College. 

Lycoming College does not ap- 
prove of the use or misuse of 
alcoholic beverages and encourages 
students to abstain from their use and 
to abide by the legal restrictions on 
alcohol use established by the Com- 
monwealth of Pennsylvania. Obser- 
vance of the law is the individual 
responsibility of each student, and 
failure to obey the law may subject 
the student to prosecution by civil 
authorities, either on or off campus. 

Students also are expected to be 
aware of the College's attitude 
toward the use and misuse of alcohol 
and to acknowledge the College's 
right to its position. The College will 
not tolerate any public use of alcohol. 
Officials of the College will prescribe 
penalties for the public or private 
misuse of alcohol. These penalties 
will be applied in a consistent man- 
ner. 

Lycoming recognizes its respon- 
sibility, however, for providing 



students with reliable information 
about the social and medical implica- 
tions of the use of alcohol. Lycoming 
makes every effort to create and 
maintain a community in which in- 
dividual choice is coupled with 
responsible behavior and respect for 
the rights of others. 

Upon enrolling, students are given 
a handbook which contains the Col- 
lege's official policies, rules, and 
regulations. These policies, rules, and 
regulations are part of the contractual 
agreement students enter into when 
they register at Lycoming. 



58 



Admission to Lycoming 



POLICY AND STANDARDS 

Lycoming College welcomes applica- 
tions from prospective students 
regardless of age, sex, race, religion, 
financial resources, color, national or 
ethnic origin, or handicap. Admis- 
sion is based on the following stan- 
dards: 

— graduation from an accredited 
secondary school; 

— completion of a college 
preparatory program that in- 
cludes English and 
mathematics plus units in 
foreign language, natural 
science and social science; 

— satisfactory College Entrance 
Examination Board Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) or 
American College Test (ACT) 
scores. 

A secondary-school student of ex- 
ceptional maturity and with signifi- 
cant academic preparation may apply 
to Lycoming as a candidate for early 
admission. If admitted, the student 
enters the College after completing 
the junior year in school. Students 
who are not enrolled in a degree pro- 
gram and who wish to enroll in one or 
more courses in any semester are 
welcome to apply. 

Lycoming is fully approved for the 
educational program for veterans. 



APPLICATION AND SELECTION 
PROCESS 

For students considering a fall 
semester admission, applications 
should be filed by April 1. The ap- 
plication should be accompanied by a 
$20 application fee, an official secon- 
dard school transcript forwarded by 
the school guidance office, and the 
results of either the Scholastic Ap- 
titude Test (SAT) or the American 
College Test (ACT). Applications are 
considered after April 1 on a space- 
available basis. 

The completed application is 
evaulated individually by identifying 
each applicant's academic achieve- 



ment, talents, qualities, and interests. 
Lycoming notifies applicants of their 
acceptance as soon as possible after 
all credentials have been received and 
evaluated. In some instances, addi- 
tional information may be needed to 
complete the evaluation. The review 
process normally begins after 
January 1. 

Admitted applicants must notify 
the College of their intent to enroll by 
May 1, the national candidates' reply 
date. This notification must be ac- 
companied by a $100 advance deposit 
which is applied to the first-term tui- 
tion. After May 1, the $100 deposit is 
not refundable. 



ADVANCED STANDING BY 
TRANSFER 

The College welcomes transfer 
students from other accredited col- 
leges and universities according to the 
following standards and procedures: 

— applicant must be in good 
academic standing, and pre- 
sent a minimum transfer grade 
point average of 2.0; 

— all courses comparable to 
those offered in the cur- 
riculum at Lycoming will be 
accepted for transfer; 

— the grades earned in all 
transferable courses are in- 
cluded in the computation of 
the transfer grade point 
average; 

— academic standing at Lycom- 
ing will be based on an evalua- 
tion of all courses attempted at 
all other institutions; 

— the final eight courses for a 
degree must be taken at 
Lycoming. 

— official copies of transcripts 
from all institutions attended 
must be submitted as a part of 
the admission application. 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their 
families are encouraged to visit the 
campus for a student-conducted tour 
and an interview with an admissions 
officer, who will provide additional 
information about the College and 
answer any questions. 

The Admissions Office is located 
on the first floor of Long Hall. For 
an appointment, telephone (717) 
326-1951, or write Office of Admis- 
sions, Lycoming College, 
Williamsport, PA 17701. Office 
hours are: 

Weekdays— September through April 
9 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 
— May through August 
9 a.m. to 4 p.m. 
Saturdays — September through April 
9 a.m. to 12 noon 
— May through August 
No Saturday hours. 





59 



Expenses and Financial Aid 



EXPENSES FOR 
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1982-83 

The following expenses are effective 
for the regular fall and spring 
semesters. The College reserves the 
right to adjust fees at any time. The 
fees for each semester are payable not 
later than the second day of classes 
for the semester. 



Fees 

Comprehensive 

Fee 

Board and 

Room Rent 

Total 



Per 

Semester 

$2,490 

1,100 
$3,590 



Per 
Year 

$4,980 

2,200 
$7,180 



One-Time Student Fees 

Application Fee 

Admissions Deposit 

Contingency Deposit 



.$ 20 
. 100 

. 75 



Part-Time Student Fees 

Application Fee $ 20 

Each Unit Course 625 

Additional Charges 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour 

per week per semester 95 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50 

Reregistration Fee 25 

Parking Permit 

(for the academic year) 10 to 15 

Parking Permit with Reserved 

Space (for the academic year) 15 to 35 

Practice Teaching Fee 

(Payable in Junior Year) 150 

R.O.T.C. Basic Course Deposit 

(Payable at Bucknell University 60 

R.O.T.C. Advanced Course Deposit 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 

Transcript Fee 

(No charge to full-time students 3 

Medical Questionnaire Fee 

(Payable to Medical Datamation, 

Inc.) 10 

The comprehensive fee covers the 
regular course load of three to four 
courses each semester. Resident 
students must board at the College 
unless, for extraordinary reasons, 
authorization is extended for other 
eating arrangements. If a double 
room is used as a single room, there is 
an additional charge of $200 per 
semester. The estimated cost for 



books and supplies is up to $200 per 
year, depending on the course of 
study. Special session (May term and 
summer term) charges for tuition, 
room, and board are established dur- 
ing the fall semester. 



ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 

Application Fee— All students for 
admission must submit a $20 applica- 
tion fee. This charge defrays the cost 
of processing the application and is 
nonrefundable. 

Admissions Deposit — After 
students have been notified of their 
admission to Lycoming, they are re- 
quired to make a $100 admissions 
deposit to confirm their intention to 
matriculate. The deposit is applied to 
the general charges for the first 
semester of attendance. After May 1, 
the deposit is nonrefundable. 

Contingency Deposit— A con- 
tingency deposit of $75 is required of 
all full-time students as a guarantee 
for payment of damage to or loss of 
College property, for library and 
parking fines, or similar penalties im- 
posed by the College. The deposit is 
collected along with other charges for 
the initial semester. The balance of 
this deposit is refunded after all debts 
to the College have been paid, either 
upon graduation or upon written re- 
quest submitted to the Registrar two 
weeks prior to voluntary permanent 
termination of enrollment at Lycom- 
ing College. 



PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

For the convenience of those who 
find it impossible to follow the 
regular schedule of payments, ar- 
rangements may be made with the 
College Business Manager for the 
monthly payment of College fees 
through various educational plans. 
Additional information concerning 
partial payments may be obtained 
from the Business Manager or Direc- 
tor of Admissions. 



REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 
WHO WITHDRAW 

Refunds of tuition and board are 
made to students who voluntarily and 
officially withdraw from the College 
while in good standing according to 
the following schedule for the fall and 
spring semesters and the comparable 
period for the May and summer 
terms: 



Period of 
Withdrawal 

During the first 

week of the 

semester 
During second 

and third week 
During the 

fourth and 

fifth week 
During the sixth 

and seventh 

week 
After seven 

weeks 



Refund 

% 

80 
60 

40 

20 




Charge 

% 

20 
40 

60 

80 
100 



60 



The date on which the Dean of the 
College approves the student's 
withdrawal form is considered the of- 
ficial date of withdrawal. Charges are 
levied for services provided after 
withdrawal. 

Lycoming scholarships and grants 
are applied during the fall and spring 
semesters on the same basis as tuition 
charges. If a withdrawing student is 
charged 60% tuition, he/she will 
receive 60% of the scholarship or 
grant. Government financial aid is 
adjusted according to federal and 
state guidelines. 

Room charges, which are establish- 
ed on a semester basis, and special 
charges, such as laboratory fees, are 
not refundable if a student leaves the 
College prior to the end of the 
semester. 

Full-time students who after reduc- 
ing their loads continue to be enrolled 
for 12 or more semester hours are not 
eligible for a refund of tuition for an 
individual course. Similarly, students 
who register for extra hours in excess 
of 16 hours per semester and who 
later reduce their loads are not elibi- 
ble after the fifth day of the semester 



for a refund of the fee charged for 
overloads. Charges will be 
recalculated for students who enroll 
full time and subsequently assume 
part-time status by reducing their 
loads below 12 hours during the drop- 
add period. The assumption of part- 
time status normally involves a 
substantial reduction of financial aid 
since most financial aid programs do 
not extend eligibility to part-time 
students. 

NON-PAYMENT OF FEES 
PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their ac- 
counts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, 
transcripts, and certifications of 
withdrawals in good standing are 
issued only when a satisfactory settle- 
ment of all financial obligations has 
been made in the Business Office. 

FINANCIAL AID POLICY 
AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded 
to individual students is the establish- 
ment of need. Scholarships may be 
awarded on the basis of financial 
need and academic ability, while 
grants are provided on the basis of 
financial need. Long-term, low-cost 
educational loans are available from 
federal and state sources to most 
students who can demonstrate need. 
Part-time employment is available to 
students. 

To apply for financial assistance, 
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Ap- 
plication (FAA) from the Office of 
Financial Aid and the CSS Financial 
Aid Form (FAF) from the secondary- 
school guidance office or Lycoming's 
Office of Financial Aid. Submit the 
FAA to Lycoming and the completed 
FAF to the College Scholarship Ser- 
vice, P.O. Box 2700, Princeton, NJ 
08541, as early as possible after 
January 1. Renewal applications are 
required annually. 



Scholarships — Freshman Recogni- 
tion Scholarships of $700 to $1,000 
each are awarded to applicants who 
have superior academic qualifications 
but do not demonstrate financial 
need. These scholarships are 
renewable each year if the student 
maintains a minimum 3.25 
cumulative grade point average. 
Other scholarships, ranging from 
$400 to full tuition, are awarded to 
freshman who rank in the top fifth of 
their secondary-school class and have 
a combined score of more than 1100 
on the College Entrance Examination 
Board Scholastic Aptitude Test 
(SAT). These scholarships are 
renewable each year if the student 
maintains a minimum 3.00 
cumulative grade point average. 

Grants-In-Aid — Lycoming has 
established an extensive program of 
grants-in-aid for worthy students who 
do not qualify for scholarships. 
Awards are based on demonstrated 
need and the prospect of the student 
contributing positively to the College 
community. Renewal requires con- 
tinued financial need, maintenance of 
satisfactory academic and citizenship 
standards, and participation in Col- 
lege activities. 

Ministerial Grants-In-Aid — 
Children of ministers of the Central 
Pennsylvania Conference of The 
United Methodist Church receive 
grants equal to one-third of the 
charges for tuition, while children of 
ministers of other Conferences of The 
United Methodist Church and of 
other denominations receive grants 
equal to one-fourth of the charges for 
tuition. Students who will be entering 
the ministry may apply for a 
preministerial student grant equal to 
one-fourth tuition. Applicants must 
complete and submit the Financial 
Aid Form (FAF), and pre-ministerial 
students must also submit the Ap- 
plication for Pre-Ministerial Grant. If 
an applicant demonstrates more need 
for financial assistance than a 
ministerial grant-in-aid provides, ad- 
ditional types of aid will be con- 
sidered. These grants-in-aid are part 



of a total financial assistance award 
to meet demonstrated need and are 
not given in addition to awards 
designed to meet established needs. 

Pell Grant formerly Federal Basic 
Educational Opportunity Grant 
(BEOG)— These grants, established 
through the Educational Amend- 
ments of 1976, provide up to $1,600 
per year for full-time students who 
can demonstrate financial need. Ap- 
plication can be made when submit- 
ting the Financial Aid Form (FAF), 
the PHEAA State Grant Application, 
or by separate federal application on 
forms which are available in 
secondary-school guidance offices 
and the Office of Student Financial 
Aid at Lycoming. All students are 
urged to apply for this program. 

Supplemental Educational Oppor- 
tunity Grants (SEOG)— This federal 
government program provides addi- 
tional assistance to those students 
with financial need. Awards can be 
made in amounts ranging from $200 
to $2,000 and are usually based en- 
tirely on exceptional financial need. 
Renewal is possible if the applicant 
has no reduction in financial need in 
succeeding years. 

National Direct Student Loan 
(NDSL) — This federal five percent in- 
terest loan permits a total of $6,000 to 
be borrowed by the undergraduate 
student at a rate not to exceed $3,000 
the first two years. Repayment does 
not begin until after graduation or 
withdrawal from college. Loans are 
normally renewed annually if the ap- 
plicant files a renewal application by 
May 1 and continues to demonstrate 
financial need. 

Federal College Work-Study 
Grants (CWSP)— An opportunity is 
provided through this program for 
students to earn part of their college 
expenses and to gain some practical 
experience by working on campus. 
Federal government financial-need 
guidelines must be met to be eligible 
for this program. Students who do 
not meet these guidelines should con- 
sult with the Career Development 
Center or Office of Student Financial 



61 



Aid for other employment oppor- 
tunities. 

Other Sources of Financial 
Assistance — 

State Grants. All applicants for 
financial aid are urged to investigate 
programs sponsored by their home 
states and to learn about and heed ap- 
plication deadlines. Pennsylvania ap- 
plicants should apply for state aid 
during their senior year in high 
school, usually before April 30. For 
additional information, applicants 
should contact their secondary-school 
guidance counselor or write: Penn- 
sylvania Higher Education Assistance 
Agency (PHEAA), Towne House, 
Harrisburg, PA 17102. New Jersey 
applicants should use the New Jersey 
version of the CSS Financial Aid 
Form to apply for their state Tuition 
Aid Grant. 

State Guaranteed Loans. Most 
states, including Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, and New York, provide state- 
guaranteed loans through local banks 



and lending institutions. This pro- 
gram provides 7-9 percent interest 
loans of up to $2,500 per year for 
educational expenses with repayment 
extended over a long-term schedule. 
Applicants should consult local banks 
early in their senior year. 

PLUS Loans. PLUS Loans are 
meant to provide additional funds for 
educational expenses. The interest 
rate is 14 percent. Parents of depen- 
dent undergraduate students may 
borrow up to $3,000 per year. In- 
dependent undergraduates may bor- 
row up to $2,500 per year; however, 
the PLUS loan, combined with any 
GSL the undergraduate may have for 
that level, cannot exceed $2,500. Ap- 
plications and information are 
available from your bank or other 
lending institution. 

Community Scholarships. In many 
communities, foundations and 
organizations, and in some cases high 
schools, provide funds for worthy 
students. Applicants should consult 
with their guidance counselor or prin- 
cipal. 



Education Financing Plans. The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which 
enable parents to pay college expenses 
on a monthly basis through selected 
companies. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Scholarships. Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligi- 
ble for three, two, and one-year 
ROTC scholarships to finance tui- 
tion, books, laboratory fees, and 
other charges with the exception of 
room and board. ROTC-scholarship 
students also receive $100 per month 
during the academic year. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Stipends. Students who par- 
ticipate in the Army ROTC program 
receive $100 per academic month of 
their junior and senior years. They 
also receive half of a second lieu- 
tenant's pay plus travel expenses for a 
six-week advanced summer camp be- 
tween junior and senior years. 




62 



Academic Calendar: 1982-83 



Fall semester 

Bills are due August 26 

Orientation of new faculty August 27 

Residence halls open August 29 

Faculty available for advising August 30 

Classes begin first period August 31 

Processing of drop/add begins August 31 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 6 

Last day for drop/add September 6 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 6 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades were 

recorded in spring. May, and summer terms October 12 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 18 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in fall semester 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester November 8-10 

Preregistration for sophomores through seniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 13 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades November 23 

Residence halls close at 10a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 24 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving recess November 28 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving November 29 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 17 

Residence halls close at 9 p. m December 17 

May term 

Residence halls open May 8 

Classes begin May 9 

Last day for drop/add May 10 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 10 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades May 27 

Terms ends Ju ne 3 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m June 3 



Spring semester 

January 6 

January 9 

January 10 
January 10 
January 14 
January 14 
January 14 



February 28 
February 18 



April 4-6 
April 9 
April 8 



March 4 
March 13 
March 14 
April 29 
April 29 

Summer term 

June 19 
June 20 
June 22 
June 22 
July 15 
July 29 
July 29 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocation August 31 

All-College picnic September 4 

Labor Day (classes in session) September 6 

Homecoming Weekend October 1-3 

Parents Weekend October 15-17 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 29 

Thanksgiving recess November 23-28 

Spring recess March 4-13 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) April 1 

Honors Day April 12 

Baccalaureate May 8 

Commencement May 8 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 30 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



63 



Directory 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Officers 

W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D Chairman 

Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Vice Chairman 

Paul G. Gilmore Secretary 

William L. Baker Treasurer 

Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Chairman Emeritus 

Honorary Trustees 
Bishop Hermann W. Kaebnick, 

D.D., L.H.D., LL.D Hershey 

Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore 

Arnold A. Phipps, II Williamsport 

Mrs. Donald G. Remley Williamsport 

George L. Stearns, II Williamsport 

Trustees 
Term expires 1983 
Elected 

1980 Richard W.DeWald Montoursville 

1974 Daniel G. Fultz Pittsford, NY 

1980 David M. Heiney, Ed. D Hughesville 

(Alumni Representative) 

1965 James G. Law, D. Text. Sci Bloomsburg 

1970 John E. Person, Jr Williamsport 

1972 Donald E. Shearer, M.D Montoursville 

1961 Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Williamsport 

1971 Willis W. Willard, III, M.D Hershey 

1954 W. Russell Zacharias Allentown 

Term expires 1984 
Elected 

1981 John B. Ernst Doylestown 

(Alumni Representative) 
1969 Samuel H. Evert Bloomsburg 

1972 The Rev. Brian A. Fetterman Harrisburg 

1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr Williamsport 

1969 Kenneth E. Himes Williamsport 

1978 JohnC. Lundy Williamsport 

1981 William Pickelner Williamsport 

1978 John Y. Schreyer Little Falls, NJ 

1978 M. L. Sharrah, Ph.D New Canaan, CT 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr Jenkintown 

Term expires 1985 
Elected 

1979 David Y. Brouse Williamsport 

1951 PaulG. Gilmore Williamsport 

1982 Mrs. Margaret D. L'Heureux Williamsport 

1973 Robert G. Little, M.D Harrisburg 

1979 David J. Loomis, Ph.D Troy 

(Alumni Representative) 
1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D Baltimore, MD 

64~ 



1973 G. Jackson Miller Altoona 

1958 Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1982 Mrs. Marguerite G. Rich Woolrich 

1961 The Rev. Wallace F. Stealer, HH.D Kingston 

1982 The Rev. Stratford C. Taylor Montoursville 



ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 

FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976) 

President 

B.A., Millsaps College; B.D., Ph.D., Emory 

University 
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 

Dean of the College 

B.A., Mundelein College; M.A., Northwestern 

University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 
WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 

Treasurer 

B.S., Lycoming College 
JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 

Dean of Student Services 

A.B., Juniata College; M.S., Syracuse University 
PAUL C. HASSENPLUG (1981) 

Director of Institutional Planning and Development 

B.S., Rochester Institute of Technology 
MARSHALL RAUCCI, JR. (1982) 

Director of Admissions 

B.A., Marist College; M.S. Ed., SUNY College at 

Buffalo 
CHRISTINE D. BARTH (1982) 

Admissions Counselor 

B.A., Lycoming College 
BETTY S. BECK (1965) 

Bookstore Manager 
DALE V. BOWER (1968) 

Director of Alumni Affairs 

B.S., Lycoming College; B.D., United Theological 

Seminary 
GEORGE W. BRELSFORD (1982) 

Residence Area Coordinator 

B.S., Davis & Elkins College 
CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 

Director of Athletics 

B.S., M.Ed., Universitv of Pittsburgh 
LOUISE A. CALIGIURi (1978) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 

B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 
JOANNE B. DAY (1981) 

Assistant Dean of Student Services 

B.A., M.Ed., Western Maryland College 
ROBERT L. EDDINGER (1967) 

Director of Buildings & Grounds 



JERRY L. EISCHEID (1981) 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., The Pennsylvania 


Campus Minister 


State University 


B.S., Mansfield State College; M.Div., United 




Theological Seminary at Dayton 




FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 




Assistant Dean of the College 




A.B., Bates College; M.A., Arizona State University; 


FACULTY 


Ph.D., University of Missouri 




THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 


EMERITI 


Director of Computer Services 




B.S., Wake Forest College; M.A., University of 


MABEL K. BAUER 


Kansas 


Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 


MARY E. HERRING (1978) 


B.S., Cornell University; M.S., University of 


Assistant Director of Admissions 


Pennsylvania 


B.A., Albright College 


LEROY F. DERR 


RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 


Professor Emeritus of Education 


Chaplain of the College 


A.B., Ursinus College; M.A., Bucknell University; 


B.A., Indiana Central College; S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston 


Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh 


University 


ROBERT H. EWING 


BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 


Professor Emeritus of History 


Director of Library Services 


A.B., College of Wooster; M.A., University of 


B.A., The Citadel; M.S.L.S., Florida State University 


Michigan; HH.D., Lycoming College 


HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969) 


JOHN P. GRAHAM 


President Emeritus 


Professor Emeritus of English 


B.A., L.L.D., Wofford College; B.D., Duke University 


Ph.B., Dickinson College; M.Ed., The Pennsylvania 


Ph.D., University of Chicago; L.H.D., Ohio Wesleyan 


State University 


University 


HAROLD W. HAYDEN 


DOUGLAS J. KEIPER (1970) 


Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of Library 


Assistant Director of Admissions 


Services 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.Ed., The Pennsylvania 


A.B., Nebraska State Teachers College; B.S., 


State University 


University of Illinois; M.A. in L.S., University of 


BETTY J. PARIS (1963) 


Michigan 


Registrar 


GEORGE W. HOWE 


A.B., Lycoming College 


Professor Emeritus of Geology 


JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979) 


A.B., M.S., Syracuse University; Ph.D., Cornell 


Director of Financial Aid 


University 


B.A., Lycoming College; M.A., Bucknell University 


M. RAYMOND JAMISON 


MARLENE D. PETTER (1982) 


Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 


Assistant Director of Public Relations 


B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Bucknell University 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University 


WALTER G. McIVER 


JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 


Professor Emeritus of Music 


Controller and Assistant Treasurer 


Mus.B., Westminster Choir College; A.B., Bucknell 


B.A., Lycoming College 


University; M.A., New York University 


WILLIAM H. RUPP (1979) 


LORING B. PRIEST 


Director of Public Relations 


Professor Emeritus of History 


B.A., M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 


Litt.B., Rutgers University; M.A., Ph.D., Harvard 


GORDON S. STEARNS (1982) 


University 


Residence Area Coordinator 


DONALD G. REMLEY 


B.A., Bowdoin College 


Assistant Professor Emeritus of Mathematics and 


THOMAS P. WOZNIAK (1979) 


Physics 


Associate Dean of Student Services 


A.B., Dickinson College; M.A., Columbia University 


B.A., Merrimack College; M.Ed., Worcester State 


MARY LANDON RUSSELL 


College 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980) 


Mus.B., Susquehanna University Conservatory of 


Assistant Director of Admissions 


Music; M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 



65 



LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 


JACK S. McCRARY (1969) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 


Sociology 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., Bucknell University; 


B.A., M.A., Southern Methodist University; Ph.D., 


D.Ed., The Pennsvlvania State University 


Washington University 


JAMES W. SHEAFFER 


ROGER W. OPDAHL (1963) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


Economics 


B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.S., 


A.B., Hofstra University; M.A., Columbia University; 


University of Pennsylvania 


D.Ed., The Pennsvlvania State University 


FRANCES K. SKEATH 


ROBERT W. RABOLD (1955) 


Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 


Economics 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; D.Ed., The 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; M.A., 


Pennsvlvania State University 


Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 


JOHN A. STUART 


JOHN A. RADSPINNER (1957) 


Professor Emeritus of English 


Chemistry 


B.A., William Jewell College; M.A., Ph.D., 


B.S., University of Richmond; M.S., Virginia 


Northwestern University 


Polytechnic Institute; D.Sc, Carnegie-Mellon 


HELEN B. WEIDMAN 


University 


Professor Emeritus of Political Science 


LOGAN A. RICHMOND (1954) 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; Ph.D., Syracuse 


Accounting 


University 


B.S., Lycoming College; M.B.A., New York 




University; C.P.A. (Pennsvlvania) 




JANET A.RODGERS (1981) 


PROFESSORS 


Nursing 




B.S. Wagner College; M.A., Ph.D., New York 


MALTHON M. ANAPOL (1981) 


University 


Mass Communication 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 


B.S., Rutgers University; M.A., Temple University; 


Dean of the College English 


Ph.D., The Ohio State University 


B.A., Mundelein College; M.A., Northwestern 


ROBERT F. FALK (1970) 


University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 


Theatre Marshal of the College 




B.A., B.D., Drew University; M.A., Ph.D., Wayne 




State University 




MORTON A. FINEMAN (1966) 




Physics 


ASSOCIA TE PROFESSORS 


A.B., Indiana University; Ph.D., University of 




Pittsburgh 


ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 


ERNEST D. GIGLIO (1972) 


Biology 


Political Science 


B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Ph.D., Cornell 


B.A., Queens College; M.A., SUNY at Albany; 


University 


Ph.D., Syracuse University 


HOWARD C. BERTHOLD, JR. (1976) 


EDUARDO GUERRA (1960) 


Psychology 


Religion 


B.A., Franklin and Marshall College; M.A., 


B.D., Southern Methodist University; S.T.M., Ph.D., 


University of Iowa; Ph.D., The University of 


Union Theological Seminary 


Massachusetts 


JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967)' 


CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 


Psychology 


Physical Education 


B.S., M.S., Bucknell University; Ph.D., The 


B.S., M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 


Pennsvlvania State University 


JACK S. DIEHL, JR. (1971) 


JOHN G. HOLLENBACK (1952) 


Biology 


Business Administration 


B.S., M.A., Sam Houston State College; M.S., Ph.D., 


B.S., M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania 


University of Connecticut 


JAMES K. HUMMER (1962) 


BERNARD P. FLAM (1963) 


Chemistry 


Spanish 


B.N.S., Tufts University; M.S., Middlebury College; 


A.B., New York University; M.A., Harvard 


Ph.D., University of North Carolina 


University; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 



66 



WILLIAM D. FORD (1972) 

English 

B.A., Occidental College; M.A., M.F.A., Ph.D., 

University of Iowa 
DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 

Chemistry 

A.B., Princeton University; M. A. T, The Johns 

Hopkins University; Ph.D., University of Virginia 
CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967) 

Mathematics 

B.S., University of Massachusetts; M.A., Ph.D., 

Harvard University 
STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970) 

Philosophy 

A.B., Cornell University; M.A., Ph.D., University of 

Pittsburgh 
DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 

Mathematics 

B.A., Acadia University; M.S., Ph.D., Queen's 

University 
JOHN R. HUBBARD (1975) * 

Mathematics 

A.B., University of Rochester; A.M., Ph.D., 

University of Michigan 
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 

Religion 

B.A., Indiana Central College; S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston 

University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 

Library Services 

B.A., The Citadel; M.S.L.S., Florida State University 
EMILY R. JENSEN (1969) 

English 

B.A., Jamestown College; M.A., University of 

Denver; Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 
MOON H. JO (1975) ** 

Sociology 

B.A., Valparaiso University; M.A., Howard 

University; Ph.D., New York University 
FORREST E. KEESBURY (1970) 

Education 

B.S., Defiance College; M.A., Bowling Green State 

University; Ed.D., Lehigh University 
ROBERT H. LARSON (1969) 

History 

B.A., The Citadel; M.A., Ph.D., University of 

Virginia 
PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970) 

German 

A.B., A.M.. Ph.D., Boston University 
GERTRUDE B. MADDEN (1958) 

English 

A.B., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Bucknell 

University 



ROBERT J. B. MAPLES (1969) 

French 

A.B., University of Rochester; Ph.D., Yale University 
JOHN F. PIPER, JR. (1969) 

History 

A.B., Lafayette College; B.D., Yale University; 

Ph.D., Duke University 
DAVID J. RIFE (1970) 

English 

B.A., University of Florida; M. A., Ph.D., Southern 

Illinois University 
MICHAEL G. ROSKIN (1972) 

Political Science 

A.B., University of California at Berkeley; M.A., 

University of California at Los Angeles; Ph.D., The 

American University 
ROGER D. SHIPLEY (1967) 

Art 

B.A., Otterbein College; M.F.A., Cranbrook 

Academv of Art 
JOHN M.WHELAN, JR. (1971) 

Philosophy 

B.A., University of Notre Dame; Ph.D., 

The University of Texas at Austin 
STANLEY T. WILK (1973) 

Anthropology 

B.A., Hunter College; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973) 

Biology 

B.A., Bridgewater College; Ph.D., University of 

Virginia 



*On Sabbatical Fall Semester 1982-83 
**On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1982-83 



ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 

RICHARD J. BARKER (1982) 

Spanish 

B.A., Hamilton College; 

M.A., University of Iowa; Ph.D. University of Oregon 
SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975) 

Library Services 

B.A., University of Delaware; M.L.S., University of 

Pittsburgh 
GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979) 

Music 

B.M., Oberlin College; M.M., Ohio University; 

D.M.A., University of Iowa 
JON R. BOGLE (1976) 

Art 

B.F.A., B.S., M.F.A., Tyler School of Art, Temple 

University 



67 



ROLF T. CARLSON (1981) 


STEPHEN E. ROBINSON (1979) 


Theatre 


Religion 


B.S., Kearney State College; M.F.A., University of 


B.A., M.A., Brigham Young University; Ph.D., Duke 


Montana 


University 


JOHN H. CONRAD (1959) 


KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981) 


Education 


Psychology 


B.S., Mansfield State College; M.A., New York 


B.S., University of Illinois; M.S., Ph.D., University of 


University 


Pittsburgh 


RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973) 


GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981) 


Astronomy and Physics 


Mathematics 


B.A., University of Minnesota; M.S., Ph.D., 


B.S., Wilkes College; 


University of Chicago 


M.A., Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


EDWARD G. GABRIEL (1977) 


LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 


Biology 


Sociology 


B.A., M.S., Alfred University; Ph.D., The Ohio State 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.P.A., University of 


University 


A rizona 


FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 


FRED M. THAYER, JR. (1976) 


Political Science 


Music 


A.B., Bates College; M.A., Arizona State University; 


A.B., Syracuse University; B.M., Ithaca College; 


Ph.D., University of Missouri 


M.M., SUNY at Binghamton; D.M.A., Cornell 


THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 


University 


Director of Computer Services Mathematics 


H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974) 


B.S., Wake Forest College; M. A., University of 


Business Administration 


Kansas 


B.B.A., Stetson University; J.D., Vanderbilt 


OWEN F. HERRING (1965) 


University; M.B.A., Florida Technological University 


Philosophy 


BUDD F. WHITEHILL (1957) 


B.A., Wake Forest College 


Physical Education 


DAVID N. JEX (1978) 


B.S., Lock Haven State College 


Music 


M.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 


B.M., University of Toledo; M.M., Bowling Green 


RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982) 


State University; D.M.A., Cleveland Institute of 


Accounting 


Music 


B.A., Lycoming College; M.S., Bucknell University; 


DAN O. KING (1977) 


M.B.A., Long Island University 


Biology 


FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978) 


B.A., University of South Florida; M.A., Ph.D., 


English 


Indiana University 


B.A., Emory University; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State 


ELIZABETH H. KING (1956) 


University; M.Div., Yale Divinity School 


Business Administration 


MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979) 


B. S. , Geneva College; M. Ed. , The Pennsylvania State 


Biology 


University 


B.S., SUNY at Cortland; M.S., Ph.D., Miami 


ELDON F.KUHNS, II (1979) 


University 


Accounting 




B.A., Lycoming College; M. Accounting, University 


*On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1982-83 


of Oklahoma; C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 




DIANE M. LESKO (1978) 




Art History 




B.A., M.A., Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


INSTRUCTORS 


RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976) 




History 


MARY ANN DOYLE (1982) 


B.A., Boston State College; M.A., Ohio University; 


Education 


Ph.D., New York University 


B.A., University College of New York at Oswego; 


CAROLE MOSES (1982) 


E.D.M., State University of New York at Buffalo 


English 


GEOFFREY L. GORDON (1981) 


B.A., Adelphi University; M.A., The Pennsylvania 


Business Administration 


State University; Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


B.S., Lehigh University; M.B.A., Duke University 



68 



DAVID B. HAIR (1979) 

Physical Education 

B.S., East Stroudsburg State College 
DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 

Physical Education 

B.S., M.S., The Pennsylvania State University 
WILLIAM E. KEIG (1980) 

Astronomy and Physics 

A.B., University of California at Santa Cruz; 

M.S., University of Chicago 
JACK D. MURPHY (1978) 

Mathematics 

B.S., M.S., Drexel University 
KATHERINE PAGANA (1982) 

Nursing 

B.S.N. , University of Maryland; M.S.N. , University 

of Pennsylvania 
RICHARD D. TROXEL (1978) 

Mathematics 

B.A., Oberlin College; M.A., Indiana University 



LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 

DON M. LARRABEE II (1972) 
Lecturer in Law 

A.B., Franklin and Marshall; LL.B., Fordham 
University 



PA R T- TIME FA CUL TY 

JOSIAH ALFORD (1982) 

Mathematics 

B.A., Principia College; M.A., 

George Washington University 
MARY P. BAGGETT (1977) 

Chemistry 

B.A., Regis College; M.A., Wellesley College 
ADELLE DOTZEL (1981) 

Mathematics 

B.S., Kings College; M.A., The Pennsylvania 

State University 
ROME A. HANKS (1982) 

Art 

B.A., M.F.A., The Pennsvlvania State University 
DANIEL HARTSOCK (1982) 

English 

B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; M.A., 

Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
RAYMOND McGINNIS (1982) 

Sociology 

B.A., Temple University; M.S. W., Marywood College 



MARY J. VESTERMARK (1977) 
Psychology 

A.B. Oberlin; M.A., Stetson University; Ph.D., 
University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill 



APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 

RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 

Organ and Piano 

A.B., Westminster Choir College; 

M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
THOMAS GALLUP (1982) 

Flute and Voice 

B.S., Mansfield State College 
ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 

Brass 

B.A., in Music Education, Mansfield State College; 

M.S., in Music Education, Ithaca College 
MARY L. RUSSELL (1936) 

Piano 

M.B., Susquehanna University; 

M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
JUANITA M. SERANG 

Violin 



A DJUNCT FA CUL TY & STAFF 

ALBERT J. STUNKARD, M.D. 

Director of Institute of Community Health 

MEDICAL STAFF 

FREDERIC C. LECHNER, M.D. 

College Physician 

B. S. , Franklin and Marshall College; 

M.D., Jefferson Medical College 
ROBERT S. YASUI, M.D. 

College Surgeon 

M.D., Temple University 
EVELYN L. SEAMAN, R.N. 

College Nurse 
Williamsport Hospital School of Nursing 



69 



ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 



Randy J. Baker Athletic Trainer 

(B.S.. Lock Haven Stale College; M.S., University of Illinois) 

Louise S. Banks Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Rebecca Bastian Data Entry Clerk 

Pauline Berrigan Secretary, United Campus Ministry 

Emily C. Biichle Coordinator Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Barbara J. Bodner Secretary to the Director of Admissions 

Barbara Bowes Bookstore Assistant 

Pauline M . Brungard Student Loan Coordinator 

IBS., Lycoming College) 

Nancy Carlin Faculty Secretary 

Kathy A. Confair Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Richard L . Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

Patricia Cundiff Systems Analyst 

Robert L. Curry Administrative Assistant in Athletics 

(A.B., Lycoming College) 

Mary Dahlgren Admissions Data Entry Assistant 

June L. Evans Secretary, Education Office 

Irene Everdale Secretary to the Director of Buildings and Grounds 

S. Jean Gair Secretary, Music and Art Departments 

Anne S. Gibbon Secretary, Biology and Chemistry Departments 

I rene V . Gohrig Secretary to Dean of Student Services 

Diane Hassinger Secretary to Director of Development 

Ralph W. Hellan Computer Operations Programmer 

(A.B.. Lycoming College) 

Helen C. Heller Secretary to the Registrar 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 



Esther L. Henninger Administrative Assistant for Admissions 

Computer Applications 

Diane C. Hess Receptionist/Sec'y, Office of Student Services 

BernadineG. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Phyllis M. Holmes Secretary to the President 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to the Athletics Director 

Sherrie Landon Administrative Assistant in Student Financial Aid 

D. MaxineMcCormick Records Clerk 

Christine McCracken Computer Programmer 

Mary Jane Murphy Secretary in Admissions Office 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary 

Phyllis B. Myers Secretary to the Director of Alumni Affairs 

Marion R. Nyman Secretary to the Treasurer 

Kimberly A. Owen Library Assistant 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

Terry Ann Raup Secretary, Athletics Office 

Dolores J. Reed I.L.L. Assistant/AV Coordinator 

Pearl M. Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Betty June Swanger Assistant in Treasurer's Office 

Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary 

Patricia J. Triaca Library Assistant 

Helen J. Vincent Library Assistant 

Deborah E. Weaver Damage Assessment Clerk 

Vickie Weaver Secretary to Director of Student Aid 

Loretta M. Whipkey Secretary to the Director of Public Relations 

Madelyn Wonderlich Secretary to the Dean of the College 

Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant 




70 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 63 

Academic Honesty 10 

Academic Honors 11 

Academic Program 5 

Academic Standing 10 

Accounting Curriculum 20 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) 21 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative Assistants 70 

Administrative Staff 64 

Admission 59 

Admissions Deposit 60 

Admissions Office 59 

Admission Policy 59 

Admission Standards 59 

Advanced Placement 11 

Advanced Standing by Transfer 59 

Advisory Committees 8 

Health Professions 8 

Legal Professions 8 

Medical Technology 8 

Theological Professions 8 

Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for 8' 

American Studies (EIM) 21 

Anthropology Curriculum 53 

Application Fee and Deposits 60 

Application Process 59 

Applied Music Requirements 45 

ArtCurriculum 22 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 23 

Athletic Training 49 

Attendance, Class 10 

Audit 14 

Awards 11 

BFA Degree 5 

Basic Educational Opportunity 

Grants (BEOG) 61 

Biology Curriculum 25 

BoardofTrustees 64 

Books and Supplies 60 

Business Administration Curriculum 27 

Calendar, Academic 63 

Career Development Services 57 

Chemistry Curriculum 29 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for 8 

ClassAttendance 10 

College and the Church 4 

College Directory 64 

College Level Examination Program 

(CLEP) 11 

Community Scholarships 62 

Computer Science Curriculum 42 

Conduct, Standards of 58 

Contents 2 

Contingency Deposits 60 

Cooperative Programs 15 

Engineering 15 

Environmental Studies 15 

Forestry ..15 

Medical Technology 15 

Military Science 17 

Nuclear Medicine Technology 16 

Optomet ry 16 

Podiatric Medicine 17 

Sculpture 17 

Counseling, Academic 8 



Counseling, Personal 57 

Course Credit by Examination 11 

Course Descriptions 20 

Criminal Justice (EIM) 30 

Curriculum 20 

Damage Charges 58 

Degree Programs 5 

Degree Requirements 5 

Dental School, Advisement for 8 

DepartmentalHonors 13 

Departmental Majors 7 

Deposits 60 

Deposit Refunds 60 

Distribution Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine Arts 6 

Foreign Language 6 

History and Social Science 7 

Mathematics 6 

Natural Science 7 

Philosophy 6 

Religion 6 

Early Admission Procedure 59 

Economics Curriculum 31 

Education Curriculum 32 

Education Financing Plans 60 

Educational Opportunity Grants 61 

Engineering, Cooperative Program 15 

English Curriculum 34 

English Requirement 6 

Entrance Examinations (CEEB) 1 1 

Entry Fees and Deposits 60 

Environmental Studies 15 

Established Interdisciplinary 

Major (EIM) 7 

Expenses 60 

Faculty 65 

Federal Grants and Loans 61 

Fees 60 

Financial Aid 60 

Financial Assistance 60 

Financial Information 60 

Fine Arts Requirements 6 

Foreign Language Requirement 6 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

Curriculum 35 

Forestry, Cooperative Program 15 

French Curriculum 36 

General Expenses 60 

German Curriculum 36 

GradingSystem 9 

Graduation Requirements 5 

Grants-in-Aid 61 

Greek Curriculum 37 

Health Professional Careers 8 

Health Services 57 

Hebrew Curriculum 37 

History Curriculum 38 

History of the College 4 

History Requirements 7 

Honor Societies 11 

Honors, Academic 11 

Honors, Departmental 13 

Independent Study 13 

Interdisciplinary Majors 7 

Established Majors (EIM) 7 

Individual Majors (EIM) 7 



International Studies 39 

Internship Programs 14 

Interviews 59 

Johnson Atelier 22 

Legal Professions, Advisement for 8 

Literature (EIM) 40 

Loans 61 

Location 3 

London Semester 17 

Lycoming Scholar Program 18 

Major 7 

Admission to 7 

Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 7 

Mass Communication (EIM) 41 

Mathematical Sciences 42 

Mathematics Requirements 6 

May Term 14 

Medical School, Advisement for 8 

Medical History 57 

Medical Staff 69 

Medical Technology 15 

Military Science 16 

Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 61 

Minor 7 

Music Curriculum 44 

National Direct Student Loans 

(NDSL) 61 

Natural Science Requirement 6 

Near East Culture and 

Archaeology (EIM) 46 

Non-Payment of Fees Penalty 61 

Nuclear Medicine Technology 16 

Nursing 46 

Optometry 16 

Optometry School, Advisement for 8 

Osteopathy School, Advisement for 8 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 14 

Part-time Student Opportunities 15 

PaymentofFees 60 

Payments, Partial 60 

Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees 61 

Personal Counseling 57 

Philosophy Curriculum 47 

Philosophy Requirement 6 

Physical Education Curriculum 49 

Physics Curriculum 23 

Placement Services 57 

Podiatric Medicine, Cooperative Program ..17 

Political Science Curriculum 49 

Psychology Curriculum 51 

Purpose and Objectives 3 

Reading Improvement Course 57 

Refunds 60 

Registration 9 

Regulations (Standards of Conduct) 58 

Religion Curriculum 52 

Religion Requirement 6 

Repeated Courses 9 

Requirements, Distribution 6 

Requirements for Admission 59 

Requirements for Graduation 5 

Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Program (ROTC) 17 

Scholarships (ROTC) 62 

Residence 57 

Residence Halls 57 



71 



Scholarships 61 

Selection Process 59 

Sculpture 22 

Social Science Requirement 6 

Sociology- Anthropology 

Curriculum 53 

Spanish Curriculum 37 

Special Features 13 

Independent Study 13 

Internship Program 14 

May Term 14 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 14 

Standards of Admission 59 

Standards of Conduct 58 

State Grants and Loans 62 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 17 

Student Records 10 

Student Services 57 

Study Abroad 14 

Summer Session Calendar 63 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 

Grant (SEOG) 61 

Theatre Curriculum 55 

The Harrisburg Urban Semester 

THUS 17 

Theological Professions, Advisement 8 

Transfer 59 

Trustees 64 

Unit Course System 9 

United Nations Semester 17 

Veterans, Approval 59 

Veterinary School, Advisement for 8 

Washington Semester 17 

Withdrawal from College 60 

Work-Study Grants 61 




72 



The general regulations and policies stated in 
this catalog are in effect for the 1982-83 
academic year. Students beginning their first 
term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1982 or 
the spring of 1983 are thereafter governed by 
the policies stated in this catalog. Requirements 
governing a student's major are those in effect 
at the time a major is formally declared and of- 
ficially accepted by the major department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions 
of the catalog to either general requirements or 
major requirements, students may be permitted 
the option of following their original program 
or a subsequent catalog version, but the Col- 
lege always reserves the right to determine 
which requirements apply. 

If a student interrupts his or her education 
for more than one semester, the catalog re- 
quirements in effect at the time of readmission 
will apply. Students on an approved leave of 
absence retain the same requirements they had 
when they entered, if their leave does not ex- 
tend beyond one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to 
amend or change the policies and procedures 
stated in this catalog without prior notice to 
those who may be affected by them.